Transmitting method for transmitting an OFDM signal generated by performing an IFFT processing on a preamble and one or more subframes into which pilot signals are inserted

ABSTRACT

A transmitting method includes: configuring a frame using a plurality of orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, by allocating a plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas; and transmitting the frame. The plurality of areas are each identified by at least one time resource among resources and at least one frequency resource among frequency resources. The frame includes a first period in which a preamble is transmitted, and a second period in which the plurality of transmission data are transmitted by at least one of time division and frequency division. The second period includes a first area, and the first area includes a data symbol generated from first transmission data, a data symbol generated from second transmission data and subsequent to the data symbol generated from the first transmission data, and a dummy symbol subsequent to the data symbol generated from the second transmission data.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present disclosure relates to a transmitting method, a receivingmethod, a transmitting apparatus, and a receiving apparatus.

BACKGROUND ART

The DVB-T2 standard is an example of a digital broadcasting standard inwhich orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) is used (seeNon-Patent Literature (NPL) 5).

In digital broadcasting according to, for instance, the DVB-T2 standard,a frame in which a plurality of data streams are multiplexed by timedivision is configured, and data is transmitted on a frame-by-framebasis.

CITATION LIST Non-Patent Literature

-   NPL 1: R. G. Gallager, “Low-density parity-check codes,” IRE Trans.    Inform. Theory, IT-8, pp. 21-28, 1962.-   NPL 2: “Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded    MIMO OFDM systems” IEEE Trans. Signal Processing., vol. 52, no. 2,    pp. 348-361, February 2004.-   NPL 3: C. Douillard, and C. Berrou, “Turbo codes with rate −m/(m+1)    constituent convolutional codes,” IEEE Trans. Commun., vol. 53, no.    10, pp. 1630-1638, October 2005.-   NPL 4: C. Berrou, “The ten-year-old turbo codes are entering into    service,” IEEE Communication Magazine, vol. 41, no. 8, pp. 110-116,    August 2003.-   NPL 5: DVB Document A122, Frame structure, channel coding and    modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial television    broadcasting system (DVB-T2), June 2008.-   NPL 6: D. J. C. Mackay, “Good error-correcting codes based on very    sparse matrices,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory, vol. 45, no. 2, pp    399-431, March 1999.-   NPL 7: S. M. Alamouti, “A simple transmit diversity technique for    wireless communications,” IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun., vol. 16,    no. 8, pp. 1451-1458, October 1998.-   NPL 8: V. Tarokh, H. Jafrkhani, and A. R. Calderbank, “Space-time    block coding for wireless communications: Performance results,”    IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun., vol. 17, no. 3, no. 3, pp. 451-460,    March 1999.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Technical Problem

A transmitting method, a receiving method, a transmitting apparatus, anda receiving apparatus which allow communication using a flexible frameconfiguration are provided.

Solutions to Problem

A transmission method according to an aspect of the present disclosureincludes: configuring a frame using a plurality of orthogonalfrequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, by allocating aplurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas; and transmittingthe frame. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least onetime resource among a plurality of time resources and at least onefrequency resource among a plurality of frequency resources. The frameincludes a first period in which a preamble which includes informationon a frame configuration of the frame is transmitted, and a secondperiod in which the plurality of transmission data are transmitted by atleast one of time division and frequency division. The second periodincludes a first area among the plurality of areas, and the first areaincludes a data symbol generated from first transmission data among theplurality of transmission data, a data symbol generated from secondtransmission data among the plurality of transmission data andsubsequent to the data symbol generated from the first transmissiondata, and a dummy symbol subsequent to the data symbol generated fromthe second transmission data.

A receiving method according to an aspect of the present disclosureincludes receiving a frame, obtaining information, and performingdemodulation. When receiving a frame, a frame which includes a firstperiod in which a preamble is transmitted, and a second period in whicha plurality of transmission data are transmitted by at least one of timedivision and frequency division is received. The frame is configuredusing a plurality of orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM)symbols, by allocating the plurality of transmission data to a pluralityof areas. Each of the plurality of areas is identified by at least onetime resource among a plurality of time resources and at least onefrequency resource among a plurality of frequency resources. Whenobtaining information, information on a frame configuration of the frameis obtained from the preamble. When performing demodulation, at leastone of the plurality of transmission data transmitted in the secondperiod is demodulated based on the information on the frameconfiguration.

A transmitting apparatus according to an aspect of the presentdisclosure includes: a frame configuring unit configured to configure aframe using a plurality of orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing(OFDM) symbols, by allocating a plurality of transmission data to aplurality of areas; and a transmitter which transmits the frame. Each ofthe plurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource amonga plurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource amonga plurality of frequency resources. The frame includes a first period inwhich a preamble which includes information on a frame configuration ofthe frame is transmitted, and a second period in which the plurality oftransmission data are transmitted by at least one of time division andfrequency division. The second period includes a first area among theplurality of areas, and the first area includes a data symbol generatedfrom first transmission data among the plurality of transmission data, adata symbol generated from second transmission data among the pluralityof transmission data and subsequent to the data symbol generated fromthe first transmission data, and a dummy symbol subsequent to the datasymbol generated from the second transmission data.

A receiving apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosureincludes a receiver, a preamble processor, and a demodulator. Thereceiver receives a frame which includes a first period in which apreamble is transmitted, and a second period in which a plurality oftransmission data are transmitted by at least one of time division andfrequency division. The frame is configured using a plurality oforthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, by allocatingthe plurality of transmission data to a plurality of areas. Each of theplurality of areas is identified by at least one time resource among aplurality of time resources and at least one frequency resource among aplurality of frequency resources. A preamble processor obtainsinformation on a frame configuration of the frame from the preamble. Ademodulator demodulates, based on the information on the frameconfiguration, at least one of the plurality of transmission datatransmitted in the second period.

Advantageous Effects of Invention

According to the transmitting apparatus, the receiving apparatus, thetransmitting method, and the receiving method according to the presentdisclosure, communication can be performed using a flexible frameconfiguration. This yields advantageous effects that high efficiency indata transmission can be achieved in a communications system andfurthermore the receiving apparatus can efficiently obtain data.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of atransmitting apparatus.

FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 3 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 4 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 5 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 6 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 7 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere a transmitting method using space time block codes is performed.

FIG. 8 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using space time block codes is performed.

FIG. 9 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere a transmitting method using an MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 10 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 11 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 12 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 13 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 14 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 15 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 16 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 17 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration in a casewhere the transmitting method using the MIMO method is performed.

FIG. 18 is a view illustrating an example of a symbol arranging method.

FIG. 19 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 20 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 21 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 22 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 23 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of areceiving apparatus.

FIG. 24 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 25 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 26 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 27 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 28 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 29 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 30 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 31 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 32 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 33 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 34 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 35 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 36 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 37 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 38 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 39 is a view illustrating an example of a symbol arranging method.

FIG. 40 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 41 is a view illustrating an insertion example of a pilot symbol tobe inserted to a data symbol group.

FIG. 42 is a view illustrating an insertion example of a pilot symbol tobe inserted to a data symbol group.

FIG. 43 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 44 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 45 is a view illustrating an example of area decomposition in afrequency direction and a time direction.

FIG. 46 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 47 is a view illustrating an example of area decomposition in thetime direction.

FIG. 48 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 49 is a view illustrating an example of a control symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 50 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 51 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 52 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 53 is a view illustrating an example of the control symbolarranging method.

FIG. 54 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 55 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 56 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 57 is a view illustrating an example of a relationship between atransmission station and a terminal.

FIG. 58 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of atransmitting apparatus.

FIG. 59 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 60 is a view illustrating an example of the symbol arrangingmethod.

FIG. 61 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of atransmitting apparatus.

FIG. 62 is a view illustrating a schematic view of an MIMO system.

FIG. 63 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 64 is a view illustrating an example of inserted dummy symbols(dummy slots).

FIG. 65 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 66 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 67 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 68 is a view illustrating an example of a designator whichindicates a frame configuration.

FIG. 69 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 70 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration.

FIG. 71 is a view illustrating an example of a designator whichindicates a frame configuration.

FIG. 72 is a view illustrating an example of a relation between a basestation and terminals.

FIG. 73 is a view illustrating an example of communication between thebase station and terminals.

FIG. 74 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of the basestation.

FIG. 75 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of aterminal.

FIG. 76 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of atransmitting apparatus included in a base station.

FIG. 77 is a view illustrating examples of data symbol group generatorsincluded in a base station.

FIG. 78 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of areceiving apparatus included in a terminal.

FIG. 79 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 80 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of timeboundaries or frequency boundaries between data symbol groups.

FIG. 81 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of timeboundaries or frequency boundaries between data symbol groups.

FIG. 82 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of the basestation.

FIG. 83 is a view illustrating another example of a configuration of thebase station.

FIG. 84 is a view illustrating an example of operation of an interleaverfor data symbol group #N.

FIG. 85 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of aninterleaver for data symbol group #N.

FIG. 86 is a view illustrating another example of a configuration of thebase station.

FIG. 87 is a view illustrating another example of a configuration of thebase station.

FIG. 88 is a view illustrating an example of operation of interleavingof carriers.

FIG. 89 is a view illustrating another example of a configuration of thebase station.

FIG. 90 is a view illustrating another example of a configuration of thebase station.

FIG. 91 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configurationof a modulated signal.

FIG. 92 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configurationof a modulated signal.

FIG. 93 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configurationof a modulated signal.

FIG. 94 is a view illustrating another example of a frame configurationof a modulated signal.

FIG. 95 is a view illustrating an example of communication between abase station and a plurality of terminals.

FIG. 96 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of a datasymbol group.

FIG. 97 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 98 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 99 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 100 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 101 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 102 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 103 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 104 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 105 is a view illustrating an example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal.

FIG. 106 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of atransmission antenna.

FIG. 107 is a view illustrating an example of a configuration of areceiving antenna.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

(Spatial Multiplexing MIMO Method)

As a communication method using a multi-antenna, for example, there is acommunication method which is referred to as MIMO (Multiple-InputMultiple-Output).

In multi-antenna communication which is typically MIMO, data receptionquality and/or a data communication rate (per unit time) can be enhancedby modulating transmission data of one or more sequences andsimultaneously transmitting the respective modulated signals fromdifferent antennas by using the same frequency (common frequency).

FIG. 62 is a view explaining an outline of a spatial multiplexing MIMOmethod. The MIMO method in FIG. 62 indicates an example ofconfigurations of a transmitting apparatus and a receiving apparatus ina case where a number of transmitting antennas is 2 (TX1 and TX2), anumber of receiving antennas (RX1 and RX2) is 2 and a number oftransmission modulated signals (transmission streams) is 2.

The transmitting apparatus has a signal generator and a wirelessprocessor. The signal generator performs communication channel coding ondata, performs MIMO precoding processing, and generates two transmissionsignals z1(t) and z2(t) which can be transmitted simultaneously by usingthe same frequency (common frequency). The wireless processormultiplexes individual transmission signals in a frequency direction asnecessary, that is, converts the transmission signals intomulti-carriers (for example, an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiplexing) method), and also inserts a pilot signal for estimation bya receiving apparatus of a transmission channel distortion, a frequencyoffset, a phase distortion and the like. However, the pilot signal mayestimate other distortions and the like, and the receiving apparatus mayalso use the pilot signal for signal detection. Note that a mode ofusing the pilot signal in the receiving apparatus is not limited to thismode. The two transmitting antennas use the two transmitting antennas(TX1 and TX2) to transmit z1(t) and z2(t).

The receiving apparatus includes the receiving antennas (RX1 and RX2), awireless processor, a channel fluctuation estimator and a signalprocessor. The receiving antenna (RX1) receives signals transmitted fromthe two transmitting antennas (TX1 and TX2) of the transmittingapparatus. The channel fluctuation estimator estimates a channelfluctuation value by using a pilot signal, and supplies a channelfluctuation estimation value to the signal processor. The signalprocessor restores data contained in z1 (t) and z2(t) based on channelvalues estimated as signals received at the two receiving antennas, andobtains the data as one piece of received data. However, the receiveddata may be a hard determination value of “0” or “1” or may be a softdetermination value such as log likelihood or a log likelihood ratio.

Moreover, various coding methods such as turbo codes (for example,Duo-Binary Turbo codes) and LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) codes areused as coding methods (NPLs 1 to 6 and the like).

First Exemplary Embodiment

FIG. 1 is an example of a configuration of a transmitting apparatus (of,for example, a broadcast station) in the present exemplary embodiment.

Data generator 102 receives an input of transmission data 10801, andcontrol signal 109. Data generator 102 performs error correction codingand mapping which is based on a modulating method, based on informationsuch as information of error correction coding contained in controlsignal 109 and information of the modulating method contained in controlsignal 109. Data generator 102 outputs data transmission (quadrature)baseband signal 103.

Second preamble generator 105 receives an input of second preambletransmission data 104, and control signal 109. Second preamble generator105 performs error correction coding and mapping which is based on amodulating method, based on information such as information of errorcorrection of a second preamble contained in control signal 109 andinformation of the modulating method contained in control signal 109.Second preamble generator 105 outputs second preamble (quadrature)baseband signal 106.

Control signal generator 108 receives an input of first preambletransmission data 107, and second preamble transmission data 104.Control signal generator 108 outputs as control signal 109 informationof a method for transmitting each symbol. Examples of the method fortransmitting each symbol includes a selected transmitting methodincluding an error correction code, a coding rate of the errorcorrection code, a modulating method, a block length, a frameconfiguration and a transmitting method for regularly switchingprecoding matrices, a method for inserting a pilot symbol, informationor the like of IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) (or inverse Fouriertransform)/FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) (or Fourier transform),information of a method for reduction a PAPR (Peak to Average PowerRatio) and information of a method for inserting a guard interval.

Frame configuring unit 110 receives an input of data transmission(quadrature) baseband signal 103, second preamble (quadrature) basebandsignal 106, and control signal 109. Frame configuring unit 110 performsrearrangement in a frequency axis and a time axis based on informationof a frame configuration contained in the control signal. Frameconfiguring unit 110 outputs (quadrature) baseband signal 111_1 ofstream 1 and (quadrature) baseband signal 111_2 of stream 2 according tothe frame configuration. (Quadrature) baseband signal 111_1 of stream 1is a signal obtained after mapping, that is, a baseband signal based ona modulating method to be used, and (quadrature) baseband signal 111_2of stream 2 is a signal obtained after mapping, that is, a basebandsignal based on a modulating method to be used.

Signal processor 112 receives an input of baseband signal 111_1 ofstream 1, baseband signal 111_2 of stream 2, and control signal 109.Signal processor 112 outputs modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained aftersignal processing based on a transmitting method contained in controlsignal 109 and modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained after the signalprocessing based on a transmitting method contained in control signal109.

Note that in the signal processor, for example, an MIMO transmittingmethod using precoding and phase change (referred to as an MIMO methodhere), an MISO (Multiple-Input Single-Output) transmitting method usingspace time block codes (space frequency block codes) (referred to as anMISO method here), and an SISO (Single-Input Single-Output) or an SIMO(Single-Input Multiple-Output) transmitting method for transmitting amodulated signal of one stream from one antenna may be used. However,there is also a case where a modulated signal of one stream istransmitted from a plurality of antennas in the SISO method and the SIMOmethod. An operation of signal processor 112 will be described in detailbelow. The MIMO transmitting method may also be an MIMO transmittingmethod which does not perform phase change.

Pilot insertion unit 114_1 receives an input of modulated signal 1(113_1) obtained after signal processing, and control signal 109. Pilotinsertion unit 114_1 inserts a pilot symbol to modulated signal 1(113_1) obtained after the signal processing, based on informationcontained in control signal 109 and related to a method for insertingthe pilot symbol. Pilot insertion unit 114_1 outputs modulated signal115_1 obtained after the pilot symbol insertion.

Pilot insertion unit 114_2 receives an input of modulated signal 2(113_2) obtained after signal processing, and control signal 109. Pilotinsertion unit 114_2 inserts a pilot symbol to modulated signal 2(113_2) obtained after the signal processing, based on informationcontained in control signal 109 and related to a method for insertingthe pilot symbol. Pilot insertion unit 114_2 outputs modulated signal115_2 obtained after the pilot symbol insertion.

IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) unit 116_1 receives an input ofmodulated signal 115_1 obtained after the pilot symbol insertion, andcontrol signal 109. IFFT unit 116_1 performs IFFT based on informationof an IFFT method contained in control signal 109. IFFT unit 116_1outputs signal 117_1 obtained after the IFFT.

IFFT unit 116_2 receives an input of modulated signal 115_2 obtainedafter the pilot symbol insertion, and control signal 109. IFFT unit116_2 performs IFFT based on information of the IFFT method contained incontrol signal 109. IFFT unit 116_2 outputs signal 117_2 obtained afterthe IFFT.

PAPR reduction unit 118_1 receives an input of signal 117_1 obtainedafter the IFFT, and control signal 109. PAPR reduction unit 118_1performs processing for PAPR reduction on signal 117_1 obtained afterthe IFFT based on information contained in control signal 109 andrelated to the PAPR reduction. PAPR reduction unit 118_1 outputs signal119_1 obtained after the PAPR reduction.

PAPR reduction unit 118_2 receives an input of signal 117_2 obtainedafter the IFFT, and control signal 109. PAPR reduction unit 118_2performs processing for PAPR reduction on signal 117_2 obtained afterthe IFFT based on information contained in control signal 109 andrelated to the PAPR reduction. PAPR reduction unit 118_2 outputs signal119_2 obtained after the PAPR reduction.

Guard interval insertion unit 120_1 receives an input of signal 119_1obtained after the PAPR reduction, and control signal 109. Guardinterval insertion unit 120_1 inserts a guard interval to signal 119_1obtained after the PAPR reduction, based on information contained incontrol signal 109 and related to a guard interval insertion method.Guard interval insertion unit 120_1 outputs signal 121_1 obtained afterthe guard interval insertion.

Guard interval insertion unit 120_2 receives an input of signal 119_2obtained after the PAPR reduction, and control signal 109. Guardinterval insertion unit 120_2 inserts a guard interval to signal 119_2obtained after the PAPR reduction, based on information contained incontrol signal 109 and related to a guard interval insertion method.Guard interval insertion unit 120_2 outputs signal 121_2 obtained afterthe guard interval insertion.

First preamble insertion unit 122 receives an input of signal 121_1obtained after the guard interval insertion, signal 121_2 obtained afterthe guard interval insertion, and first preamble transmission data 107.First preamble insertion unit 122 generates a first preamble signal fromfirst preamble transmission data 107. First preamble insertion unit 122adds the first preamble to signal 121_1 obtained after the guardinterval insertion. First preamble insertion unit 122 adds the firstpreamble to signal 123_1 obtained after the addition of the firstpreamble, and signal 121_2 obtained after the guard interval insertion.First preamble insertion unit 122 outputs signal 123_2 obtained afterthe addition of the first preamble. Note that the first preamble signalmay be added to both of signal 123_1 obtained after the addition of thefirst preamble and signal 123_2 obtained after addition of the firstpreamble, and also may be added to any one of signal 123_1 obtainedafter the addition of the first preamble and signal 123_2 obtained afteraddition of the first preamble. When the first preamble signal is addedto one of signal 123_1 and signal 123_2, the signal to which the firstpreamble is not added includes a zero signal as a baseband signal in asection in which the signal to which the first preamble is added isadded.

Wireless processor 124_1 receives an input of signal 123_1 obtainedafter the addition of the first preamble. Wireless processor 124_1performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification onsignal 123_1. Wireless processor 124_1 outputs transmission signal125_1. Then, transmission signal 125_1 is output as a radio wave fromantenna 126_1.

Wireless processor 124_2 receives an input of signal 123_2 obtainedafter the addition of the first preamble. Wireless processor 124_2performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification onsignal 123_2. Wireless processor 124_2 outputs transmission signal125_2. Then, transmission signal 125_2 is output as a radio wave fromantenna 126_2.

Note that in the present exemplary embodiment, the MIMO transmittingmethod using precoding and phase change, the MISO (Multiple-InputSingle-Output) transmitting method using space time block codes (orspace frequency block codes), and the SISO (Single-Input Single-Output)or the SIMO (Single-Input Single-Output) transmitting method are used asdescribed above (details will be described below).

FIGS. 2 to 6 are examples of frame configurations of a modulated signalto be transmitted by the above-described transmitting apparatus.Characteristics of each frame configuration will be described below.

FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a first frame configuration. In FIG. 2,a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier such as anOFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on the verticalaxis frequency.

FIG. 2 illustrates first preamble 201, second preamble 202, data symbolgroup #1 203, data symbol group #2 204, and data symbol group #3 205.

First, the data symbol groups will be described.

A data symbol group may be allocated per video and/or audio stream. Forexample, symbols for transmitting a first video and/or audio stream areof data symbol group #1 (203), symbols for transmitting a second videoand/or audio stream are of data symbol group #2 (204), and symbols fortransmitting a third video and/or audio stream are of data symbol group#3 (205). This point is not limited to FIG. 2, and the same also appliesto FIGS. 3, 4, 5 and 6. This point is not limited to FIG. 2, and thesame also applies to FIGS. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Moreover, for example, PLP (Physical Layer Pipe) in a standard such asDVB-T2 (a second generation digital terrestrial television broadcastingsystem) may also be referred to as a data symbol group. That is, in FIG.2, data symbol group #1 (203) may be referred to as PLP #1, data symbolgroup #2 (204) may be referred to as PLP #2, and data symbol group #3(205) may be referred to as PLP #3. This point is not limited to FIG. 2,and the same also applies to FIGS. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

First preamble 201 and second preamble 202 include, for example, asymbol for performing frequency synchronization and timesynchronization, an example of which is a PSK (Phase Shift Keying)symbol having signal point arrangement in an in-phase I-quadrature Qplane known in the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus, apilot symbol for estimation by the receiving apparatus of a channelfluctuation, an example of which is a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbolhaving signal point arrangement in an in-phase I-quadrature Q planeknown in the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus, asymbol for transmitting method information of each data symbol group(information for identifying the SISO method, the MISO method and theMIMO method), a symbol for transmitting information related to an errorcorrection code of each data symbol group (for example, a code lengthand a coding rate), a symbol for transmitting information related to amethod for modulating each data symbol (in a case of the MISO method orthe MIMO method, since there is a plurality of streams, a plurality ofmodulating methods is specified), a symbol for transmitting transmittingmethod information of the first and second preambles, a symbol fortransmitting information related to an error correction code of thefirst and second preambles, a symbol for transmitting informationrelated to a method for modulating the first and second preambles, asymbol for transmitting information related to a method for inserting apilot symbol, and a symbol for transmitting information related to amethod for suppressing a PAPR. This point is not limited to FIG. 2, andthe same also applies to FIGS. 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Characteristic points in FIG. 2 are such that a data symbol group issubjected to temporal division and is transmitted.

Note that in FIG. 2, a symbol for transmitting a pilot symbol or controlinformation may be inserted to a data symbol group. Moreover, a datasymbol group may also be a symbol group based on the MIMO (transmitting)method and the MISO (transmitting) method. As a matter of course, thedata symbol group may be a symbol group of the SISO (SIMO) method. Inthis case, at the same time and the same (common) frequency, a pluralityof streams (s1 and s2 described below) is transmitted. In this case, atthe same time and the same (common) frequency, a plurality of modulatedsignals is transmitted from a plurality of (different) antennas. Then,this point is not limited to FIG. 2, and the same also applies to FIGS.3, 4, 5 and 6.

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 illustrates an example of asecond frame configuration. In FIG. 3, a vertical axis indicates afrequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then, since atransmitting method using a multi-carrier such as an OFDM method isused, there is a plurality of carriers on the vertical axis frequency.Note that the same elements as the elements in FIG. 2 are assigned thesame reference numerals in FIG. 3, and operate in the same way as inFIG. 2.

Characteristic points in FIG. 3 are such that first preamble 301 andsecond preamble 302 are inserted (temporarily) between data symbol group#2 (204) and data symbol group #3 (205). That is, when a symbol groupformed with a “first preamble, a second preamble and a data symbolgroup” is referred to as a group, there are a first group which includesthe first preamble, the second preamble, data symbol group #1 and datasymbol group #2 and a second group which includes the first preamble,the second preamble and data symbol group #3, and configurations of thedata symbol group contained in the first group and of the data symbolgroup contained in the second group are different.

In such a case, for example, a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #1 and a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #2 are different in coding compressibility of a videoand/or audio, but may be the same “video and/or audio.” In this way,there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can obtain a desired“video and/or audio” with high quality by a method as simple asselecting “whether to demodulate data symbol group #1 or demodulate datasymbol group #2,” and that since a preamble can be made common in thiscase, control information transmission efficiency can be enhanced.

However, contrarily, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol #2 may be different).

Moreover, it becomes easy to make the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #1 the same as a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2, and to make a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #3 different from the transmitting methodfor transmitting data symbol group #1 (the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2).

Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted to a data symbolgroup. In this case, a pilot symbol inserting method is different pertransmitting method. Note that since a number of modulated signals to betransmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease intransmission efficiency owing to insertion of the pilot symbol can beprevented by gathering a data symbol group per transmitting method.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 illustrates an example of a thirdframe configuration. In FIG. 4, a vertical axis indicates a frequency,and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then, since a transmitting methodusing a multi-carrier such as an OFDM method is used, there is aplurality of carriers on the vertical axis frequency. Note that elementsoperating in the same way as in FIG. 2 are assigned the same referencenumerals in FIG. 4, and operate in the same way as in FIG. 2.

Characteristic points in FIG. 4 are such that data symbol group #1 anddata symbol group #2 are subjected to frequency division, and that inaddition, “data symbol group #1 (401_1) and data symbol group #2 (402)”and “data symbol group #3 (403)” are subjected to temporal division.That is, data symbol groups are transmitted by using frequency divisionand temporal division in combination.

Next, FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 5 illustrates an example of afourth frame configuration. In FIG. 5, a vertical axis indicates afrequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then, since atransmitting method using a multi-carrier such as an OFDM method isused, there is a plurality of carriers on the vertical axis frequency.Note that elements operating in the same way as in FIGS. 2 and 4 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 5, and operate in the sameway as in FIGS. 2 and 4.

Characteristic points in FIG. 5 are such that, as with FIG. 4, datasymbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 are subjected to frequencydivision, and that in addition, “data symbol group #1 (401_1) and datasymbol group #2 (402)” and “data symbol group #3 (403)” are subjected totemporal division. That is, data symbol groups are transmitted by usingfrequency division and temporal division in combination.

In addition, characteristic points in FIG. 5 are such that firstpreamble 301 and second preamble 302 are inserted (temporarily) between“data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol #2 (402)” anddata symbol group #3 (403). That is, when a symbol group formed with a“first preamble, a second preamble and a data symbol group” is referredto as a group, there are a first group which includes the firstpreamble, the second preamble, data symbol group #1 and data symbolgroup #2 and a second group which includes the first preamble, thesecond preamble and data symbol group #3, and configurations of the datasymbol group contained in the first group and of the data symbol groupcontained in the second group are different.

In such a case, for example, a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #1 and a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #2 are different in coding compressibility of a videoand/or audio, but may be the same “video and/or audio.” In this way,there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can obtain a desired“video and/or audio” with high quality by a method as simple asselecting “whether to demodulate data symbol group #1 or demodulate datasymbol group #2,” and that since a preamble can be made common in thiscase, control information transmission efficiency can be enhanced.

However, contrarily, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol #2 may be different.

Moreover, it becomes easy to make the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #1 the same as a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2, and to make a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #3 different from the transmitting methodfor transmitting data symbol group #1 (the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2).

Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted to a data symbolgroup. In this case, a pilot symbol inserting method is different pertransmitting method. Note that since a number of modulated signals to betransmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease intransmission efficiency owing to insertion of the pilot symbol can beprevented by gathering a data symbol group per transmitting method.

Next, FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a fifthframe configuration. In FIG. 6, a vertical axis indicates a frequency,and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then, since a transmitting methodusing a multi-carrier such as an OFDM method is used, there is aplurality of carriers on the vertical axis frequency. Note that elementsoperating in the same way as in FIGS. 2 and 4 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 6, and operate in the same way as in FIGS. 2and 4.

Characteristic points in FIG. 6 are such that, as with FIGS. 4 and 5,data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 are subjected to frequencydivision, and that in addition, “data symbol group #1 (401_1) and datasymbol group #2 (402)” and “data symbol group #3 (403)” are subjected totemporal division. That is, data symbol groups are transmitted by usingfrequency division and temporal division in combination.

In addition, characteristic points in FIG. 6 are such that a pilotsymbol is inserted (temporarily) between “data symbol groups #1 (401_1and 401_2) and data symbol #2 (402)” and data symbol group #3 (403).

In such a case, for example, a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #1 and a video and/or audio to be transmitted withdata symbol group #2 are different in coding compressibility of a videoand/or audio, but may be the same “video and/or audio.” In this way,there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can obtain a desired“video and/or audio” with high quality by a method as simple asselecting “whether to demodulate data symbol group #1 or demodulate datasymbol group #2,” and that since a preamble can be made common in thiscase, control information transmission efficiency can be enhanced.

However, contrarily, the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to be transmitted with datasymbol #2 may be different.

Moreover, it becomes easy to make the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #1 the same as a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2, and to make a transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #3 different from the transmitting methodfor transmitting data symbol group #1 (the transmitting method fortransmitting data symbol group #2).

Although described below, a pilot symbol is inserted to a data symbolgroup. In this case, a pilot symbol inserting method is different pertransmitting method. Note that since a number of modulated signals to betransmitted may be different, there is a possibility that a decrease intransmission efficiency owing to insertion of the pilot symbol can beprevented by gathering a data symbol group per transmitting method.

Note that in the case of the MISO method or the MIMO method, a pilotsymbol is inserted to each modulated signal to be transmitted from eachtransmitting antenna.

Then, the insertion of pilot symbol 601 as illustrated in FIG. 6 makesit possible for the receiving apparatus to perform highly precisechannel estimation for wave detection and demodulation of each datasymbol group. Moreover, when methods for transmitting data symbols areswitched, the receiving apparatus needs to adjust a gain of a receivedsignal suitable for the transmitting apparatus. However, it is possibleto obtain an advantage that the gain can be adjusted easily by pilotsymbol 601.

Note that in FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, for example, a video and/or audio to betransmitted with data symbol group #1 and a video and/or audio to betransmitted with data symbol group #2 are different in codingcompressibility of a video and/or audio, but may be the same “videoand/or audio.” In this way, there is an advantage that the receivingapparatus can obtain a desired “video and/or audio” with high quality bya method as simple as selecting “whether to demodulate data symbol group#1 or demodulate data symbol group #2,” and that since a preamble can bemade common in this case, control information transmission efficiencycan be enhanced. However, contrarily, the video and/or audio to betransmitted with data symbol group #1 and the video and/or audio to betransmitted with data symbol #2 may be different.

FIGS. 4, 5 and 6 illustrate the examples where a data symbol groupsubjected to time division is arranged after a data symbol groupsubjected to frequency division. However, the arrangement is not limitedto this arrangement. The data symbol group subjected to frequencydivision may be arranged after the data symbol group subjected to timedivision. In this case, in the example in FIG. 5, the first preamble andthe second preamble are inserted between the data symbol group subjectedto time division and the data symbol group subjected to frequencydivision. However, symbols other than the first preamble and the secondpreamble may be inserted. Then, in the example in FIG. 6, the pilotsymbol is inserted between the data symbol group subjected to timedivision and the data symbol group subjected to frequency division.However, symbols other than the pilot symbol may be inserted.

Characteristic points of the present exemplary embodiment will bedescribed.

As described above, the frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to 6 haverespective advantages. Hence, the transmitting apparatus selects any ofthe frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to 6 according to compressibilityand a type of data (stream), a transmitting method combining method anda method of service to be provided to a terminal, and transmits symbolssuch as control information, pilot symbols and data symbols.

In order to realize the above, the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) mayincorporate “information related to a frame configuration” fortransmitting information related to a frame configuration to thereceiving apparatus (terminal) in the first preamble or the secondpreamble.

For example, in a case where the transmitting apparatus transmits amodulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 2 when three bitsof v0, v1 and v2 are allocated as the “information related to the frameconfiguration,” the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0,0) and transmits the “information related to the frame configuration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 3, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 0, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 4, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 1, 0) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 1, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (1, 0, 0) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

Then, the receiving apparatus can learn an outline of a frameconfiguration of a modulated signal transmitted by the transmittingapparatus, from the “information related to the frame configuration.”

As described above, the data symbol group is a symbol of any of the SISO(or SIMO) method, the MISO method and the MIMO method. The MISO methodand the MIMO method will be described in particular below.

The MISO (transmitting) method using space time block codes (spacefrequency block codes) will be described.

A configuration in a case where signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 performsa transmitting method using space time block codes will be describedwith reference to FIG. 7.

Mapper 702 receives an input of data signal (data obtained after errorcorrection coding) 701 and control signal 706. Mapper 702 performsmapping based on information contained in control signal 706 and relatedto a modulating method. Mapper 702 outputs signal 703 obtained after themapping. For example, signal 703 obtained after the mapping is arrangedin order of s0, s1, s2, s3, s(2i), s(2i+1), (i is an integer equal to ormore than 0).

MISO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) processor 704 receives an input ofsignal 703 obtained after the mapping and control signal 706. MISOprocessor 704 outputs signals 705A and 705B obtained after MISOprocessing in a case where control signal 706 instructs transmission bythe MISO method. For example, signal 705A obtained after the MISOprocessing is of s0, s1, s2, s3, s(2i), s(2i+1), . . . , and signal 705Bobtained after the MISO processing is of −s1*, s0*, −s3*, s2* . . . ,−s(2i+1)*, s(2i)*, . . . . Note that “*” means a complex conjugate (forexample, s0* is a complex conjugate of s0).

In this case, signals 705A and 705B obtained after the MISO processingcorrespond to modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signalprocessing in FIG. 1, and modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained aftersignal processing, respectively. Note that a method of space time blockcodes is not limited to the above.

Then, modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing issubjected to predetermined processing, and is transmitted as a radiowave from antenna 126_1. Moreover, modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtainedafter the signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing,and is transmitted as a radio wave from antenna 126_2.

FIG. 8 is a configuration in a case where a transmitting method usingspace time block codes different from the configuration in FIG. 7 isperformed.

Mapper 702 receives an input of data signal (data obtained after errorcorrection coding) 701 and control signal 706. Mapper 702 performsmapping based on information contained in control signal 706 and relatedto a modulating method. Mapper 702 outputs signal 703 obtained after themapping. For example, signal 703 obtained after the mapping is arrangedin order of s0, s1, s2, s3, s(2i), s(2i+1), . . . (i is an integer equalto or more than 0).

MISO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) processor 704 receives an input ofsignal 703 obtained after the mapping and control signal 706. MISOprocessor 704 outputs signals 705A and 705B obtained after MISOprocessing in a case where control signal 706 instructs transmission bythe MISO method. For example, signal 705A obtained after the MISOprocessing is of s0, −s1*, s2, −s3*, s(2i), −s(2i+1)*, . . . , andsignal 705B obtained after the MISO processing is of s1, s0*, s3, s2* .. . , s(2i+1), s(2i)*, . . . . Note that “*” means a complex conjugate.For example, s0* is a complex conjugate of s0.

In this case, signals 705A and 705B obtained after the MISO processingcorrespond to modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after signalprocessing in FIG. 1, and modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtained aftersignal processing, respectively. Note that a method of space time blockcodes is not limited to the above.

Then, modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtained after the signal processing issubjected to predetermined processing, and is transmitted as a radiowave from antenna 126_1. Moreover, modulated signal 2 (113_2) obtainedafter the signal processing is subjected to predetermined processing,and is transmitted as a radio wave from antenna 126_2.

Next, an MIMO method to which precoding, phase change and power changeare applied will be described as an example of the MIMO method. However,the method for transmitting a plurality of streams from a plurality ofantennas is not limited to this method, and the present exemplaryembodiment can also be carried out by another method.

A configuration in a case where signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 performsa transmitting method using the MIMO method will be described withreference to FIGS. 9 to 17.

Encoder 1102 in FIG. 9 receives an input of information 1101, andcontrol signal 1112. Encoder 1102 performs encoding based on informationof a coding rate and a code length (block length) contained in controlsignal 1112. Encoder 1102 outputs encoded data 1103.

Mapper 1104 receives an input of encoded data 1103, and control signal1112. Then, it is assumed that control signal 1112 specifiestransmission of two streams as a transmitting method. In addition, it isassumed that control signal 1112 specifies modulating method α andmodulating method β as modulating methods of the two streams,respectively. Note that modulating method α is a modulating method formodulating x-bit data, and modulating method β is a modulating methodfor modulating y-bit data. For example, the modulating method is amodulating method for modulating 4-bit data in a case of 16QAM (16Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), and a modulating method for modulating6-bit data in a case of 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation).

Then, mapper 1104 modulates the x-bit data of x+y-bit data by modulatingmethod α, generates and outputs baseband signal s₁(t) 1105A, and alsomodulates the remaining y-bit data by modulating method β, and outputsbaseband signal s₂(t) 11058 (note that FIG. 9 illustrates one mapper,but as another configuration, there may separately be a mapper forgenerating s₁(t) and a mapper for generating s₂(t). In this case,encoded data 1103 is sorted to the mapper for generating s₁(t) and themapper for generating s₂(t)).

Note that s₁(t) and s₂(t) are expressed by complex numbers (however,s₁(t) and s₂(t) may be any of complex numbers and actual numbers), and trepresents time. Note that when a transmitting method usingmulti-carriers such as OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)is used, each of s₁ and s₂ can also be considered as a function offrequency f like s₁(f) and s₂(f) or as a function of time t andfrequency f like s₁(t, f) and s₂(t, f).

A baseband signal, a precoding matrix, phase change and the like will bedescribed below as a function of time t, but may be considered as afunction of frequency f and a function of time t and frequency f.

Hence, there is also a case where a baseband signal, a precoding matrix,phase change and the like are described as a function of symbol numberi. However, in this case, a baseband signal, a precoding matrix, phasechange and the like only need to be considered as a function of time t,a function of frequency f and a function of time t and frequency f. Thatis, a symbol and a baseband signal may be generated and arranged in atime axis direction, and may be generated and arranged in a frequencyaxis direction. Moreover, a symbol and a baseband signal may begenerated and arranged in the time axis direction and the frequency axisdirection.

Power changer 1106A (power adjuster 1106A) receives an input of basebandsignal s₁(t) 1105A, and control signal 1112. Power changer 1106A setsactual number P₁ based on control signal 1112. Power changer 1106Aoutputs P₁×s₁(t) as signal 1107A obtained after power change. Note thatP₁ is assumed to be an actual number, but may be a complex number.

Similarly, power changer 1106B (power adjuster 1106B) receives an inputof baseband signal s₂(t) 1105B, and control signal 512. Power changer1106B sets actual number P₂. Power changer 1106B outputs P₂×s₂(t) assignal 1107B obtained after power change. Note that P₂ is assumed to bean actual number, but may be a complex number.

Weighting synthesizer 1108 receives an input of signal 1107A obtainedafter the power change, signal 1107B obtained after the power change,and control signal 1112. Weighting synthesizer 1108 sets precodingmatrix F (or F(i)) based on control signal 1112. Weighting synthesizer1108 performs the following arithmetic operation, assuming that a slotnumber (symbol number) is i.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 1} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{u_{1}(i)} \\{u_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {F\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & (1)\end{matrix}$

Here, a(i), b(i), c(i) and d(i) can be expressed by complex numbers (ormay be actual numbers), and three or more of a(i), b(i), c(i) and d(i)should not be 0 (zero). Note that a precoding matrix may be a functionof i or may not be the function of i. Then, when a precoding matrix isthe function of i, the precoding matrices are switched according to aslot number (symbol number).

Then, weighting synthesizer 1108 outputs u₁(i) in equation (1) as signal1109A obtained after weighting synthesis. Weighting synthesizer 1108outputs u₂(i) in equation (1) as signal 1109B obtained after theweighting synthesis.

Power changer 1110A receives an input of signal 1109A (u₁(i)) obtainedafter the weighting synthesis, and control signal 512. Power changer1110A sets actual number Q₁ based on control signal 1112. Power changer1110A outputs Q₁×u₁(t) as signal 1111A (z₁(i)) obtained after powerchange (note that Q₁ is assumed to be an actual number, but may be acomplex number).

Similarly, power changer 1110B receives an input of signal 1109B (u₂(i))obtained after the weighting synthesis, and control signal 1112. Powerchanger 1110B sets actual number Q₂ based on control signal 512. Powerchanger 1110B outputs Q₂×u₂(t) as signal 1111B (z₂(i)) obtained afterthe power change (note that Q₂ is assumed to be an actual number, butmay be a complex number).

Hence, the following equation holds.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 2} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (2)\end{matrix}$

Next, a method for transmitting two streams different from thetransmitting method in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.10. Note that elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 9 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 10.

Phase changer 1161 receives an input of signal 1109B obtained afterweighting synthesis of u₂(i) in equation (1), and control signal 1112.Phase changer 1161 changes a phase of signal 1109B obtained after theweighting synthesis of u₂(i) in equation (1) based on control signal1112. Hence, a signal obtained after the phase change of signal 1109Bobtained after the weighting synthesis of u₂(i) in equation (1) isexpressed by e^(jθ(i))×u₂(i). Phase changer 1161 outputs e^(jθ(i))×u₂(i)as signal 1162 obtained after the phase change (j is a unit of animaginary number). Note that a value of a phase to be changed is aportion characterized by being the function of i like θ(i).

Then, power changers 1110A and 1110B in FIG. 10 each perform powerchange of an input signal. Hence, output z₁(i) and output z₂(i) ofrespective power changers 1110A and 1110B in FIG. 10 are expressed bythe following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 3} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & (3)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (3), there is FIG. 11 as aconfiguration different from the configuration in FIG. 10. A differencebetween FIGS. 10 and 11 is that the power changer and the phase changersare switched in order. Functions themselves of changing power andchanging phases are not changed. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) areexpressed by the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 4} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{P_{1} \times {s_{1}(i)}} \\{P_{2} \times {s_{2}(i)}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & (4)\end{matrix}$

When value θ(i) of a phase to be changed in equation (3) and equation(4) is set such that, for example, θ(i+1)−θ(i) is a fixed value, thereceiving apparatus is highly likely to obtain good data receptionquality in radio wave propagation environment in which a direct wave isdominant. However, how to give value θ(i) of a phase to be changed isnot limited to this example.

The case where there are some of (or all of) the power changers isdescribed as an example with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. However, therecan also be considered a case where some of the power changers do notexist.

For example, when there are neither power changer 1106A (power adjuster1106A) nor power changer 1106B (power adjuster 1106B) in FIG. 9, z₁(i)and z₂(i) are expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 5} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (5)\end{matrix}$

Moreover, when there are neither power changer 1110A (power adjuster1110A) nor power changer 1110B (power adjuster 1110B) in FIG. 9, z₁(i)and z₂(i) are expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 6} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (6)\end{matrix}$

Moreover, when there are neither power changer 1106A (power adjuster1106A), nor power changer 1106B (power adjuster 1106B), nor powerchanger 1110A (power adjuster 1110A) nor power changer 1110B (poweradjuster 1110B) in FIG. 9, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 7} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (7)\end{matrix}$

Moreover, when there are neither power changer 1106A (power adjuster1106A) nor power changer 1106B (power adjuster 1106B) in FIG. 10 or 11,z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 8} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & (8)\end{matrix}$

Moreover, when there are neither power changer 1110A (power adjuster1110A) nor power changer 1110B (power adjuster 1110B) in FIG. 10 or 11,z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 9} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (9)\end{matrix}$

Moreover, when there are neither power changer 1106A (power adjuster1106A), nor power changer 1106B (power adjuster 1106B), nor powerchanger 1110A (power adjuster 1110A) nor power changer 1110B (poweradjuster 1110B) in FIG. 10 or 11, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 10} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (10)\end{matrix}$

Next, a method for transmitting two streams different from thetransmitting methods in FIGS. 9 to 11 will be described with referenceto FIG. 12. Note that elements operating in the same way as in FIGS. 9to 11 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 12, and will notbe described.

Characteristic points in FIG. 12 are such that phase changer 1151 isinserted.

Phase changer 1151 receives an input of baseband signal s₂(i) 1105B, andcontrol signal 1112. Phase changer 1151 changes a phase of basebandsignal s₂(i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, a phasechange value is e^(jλ(i)) (j is a unit of an imaginary number). Notethat a value of a phase to be changed is a portion characterized bybeing a function of i like λ(i).

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (10),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 12 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 11} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (11)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (11), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 12.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 12} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (12)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (11) and z₁(i) of equation (12)are equal, and z₂(i) of equation (11) and z₂(i) of equation (12) areequal.

FIG. 13 is another configuration which can realize the same processingas the processing in FIG. 12. Note that elements operating in the sameway as in FIGS. 9 to 12 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.13, and will not be described. Then, a difference between FIGS. 12 and13 is that order in which power changer 1110E and phase changer 1161 areswitched in FIG. 12 is order in FIG. 13. Functions themselves ofchanging power and changing phases are not changed.

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (12),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 13 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 13} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (13)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (13), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 13.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 14} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (14)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (11), z₁(i) of equation (12),z₁(i) of equation (13) and z₁(i) of equation (14) are equal, and z₂(i)of equation (11), z₂(i) of equation (12), z₂(i) of equation (13) andz₂(i) of equation (14) are equal.

Next, a method for transmitting two streams different from thetransmitting methods in FIGS. 9 to 13 will be described with referenceto FIG. 14. Note that elements operating in the same way as in FIGS. 9to 13 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 14, and will notbe described.

Characteristic points in FIG. 14 are such that phase changer 1181 andphase changer 1151 are inserted.

Phase changer 1151 receives an input of baseband signal s₂(i) 1105B, andcontrol signal 1112. Phase changer 1151 changes a phase of basebandsignal s₂(i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, a phasechange value is e^(jλ(i)) (j is a unit of an imaginary number). Notethat a value of a phase to be changed is a portion characterized bybeing a function of i like λ(i).

Moreover, phase changer 1181 receives an input of baseband signal s₁(i)1105A, and control signal 1112. Phase changer 1181 changes a phase ofbaseband signal s₁(i) 1105A based on control signal 1112. In this case,a phase change value is e^(jδ(i)) (j is a unit of an imaginary number).Note that a value of a phase to be changed is a portion characterized bybeing a function of i like δ(i).

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (14),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 14 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 15} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (15)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (15), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder and of switching power changer 1106A and phase changer 1181 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 14.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases, are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 16} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (16)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (15) and z₁(i) of equation (16)are equal, and z₂(i) of equation (15) and z₂(i) of equation (16) areequal.

FIG. 15 is another configuration which can realize the same processingas the processing in FIG. 14. Note that elements operating in the sameway as in FIGS. 9 to 14 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.15, and will not be described. Then, a difference between FIGS. 14 and15 is that order in which power changer 1110B and phase changer 1161 areswitched in FIG. 14 is order in FIG. 15 (functions themselves ofchanging power and changing phases are not changed).

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (16),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 15 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 17} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (17)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (17), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder and of switching power changer 1106A and phase changer 1181 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 15.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 18} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (18)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (15), z₁(i) of equation (16),z₁(i) of equation (17) and z₁(i) of equation (18) are equal, and z₂(i)of equation (15), z₂(i) of equation (16), z₂(i) of equation (17) andz₂(i) of equation (18) are equal.

Next, a method for transmitting two streams different from thetransmitting methods in FIGS. 9 to 15 will be described with referenceto FIG. 16. Note that elements operating in the same way as in FIGS. 9to 15 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 16, and will notbe described.

Characteristic points in FIG. 16 are such that phase changer 1181, phasechanger 1151, phase changer 1110A and phase changer 1110B are inserted.

Phase changer 1151 receives an input of baseband signal s₂(i) 1105B, andcontrol signal 1112. Phase changer 1151 changes a phase of basebandsignal s₂(i) 1105B based on control signal 1112. In this case, a phasechange value is e^(jλ(i)) (j is a unit of an imaginary number). Notethat a value of a phase to be changed is a portion characterized bybeing a function of i like λ(i).

Moreover, phase changer 1181 receives an input of baseband signal s₁(i)1105A, and control signal 1112. Phase changer 1181 changes a phase ofbaseband signal s₁(i) 1105A based on control signal 1112. In this case,a phase change value is e^(jδ(i)) (j is a unit of an imaginary number).Note that a value of a phase to be changed is a portion characterized bybeing a function of i like δ(i).

Phase changer 1161 performs phase change on an input signal. A phasechange value in this case is θ(i). Similarly, phase changer 1191performs phase change on an input signal. A phase change value in thiscase is ω(i).

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (18),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 16 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 19} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (19)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (19), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder and of switching power changer 1106A and phase changer 1181 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 16.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 20} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (20)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (19) and z₁(i) of equation (20)are equal, and z₂(i) of equation (19) and z₂(i) of equation (20) areequal.

FIG. 17 is another configuration which can realize the same processingas the processing in FIG. 16. Note that elements operating in the sameway as in FIGS. 9 to 16 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.17, and will not be described. Then, a difference between FIGS. 16 and17 is that order in which power changer 1110B and phase changer 1161 areswitched in FIG. 14 and order in which power changer 1110A and phasechanger 1191 are switched in FIG. 14 are order in FIG. 17. Functionsthemselves of changing power and changing phases are not changed.

Then, as considered in the same way as equation (1) to equation (20),z₁(i) and z₂(i) which are output signals in FIG. 17 are expressed by thefollowing equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 21} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (21)\end{matrix}$

Note that as a method for realizing equation (21), there is aconfiguration of switching power changer 1106B and phase changer 1151 inorder and of switching power changer 1106A and phase changer 1181 inorder as a configuration different from the configuration in FIG. 17.Functions themselves of changing power and changing phases are notchanged. In this case, z₁(i) and z₂(i) are expressed by the followingequation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 22} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\omega{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{a(i)} & {b(i)} \\{c(i)} & {d(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\delta{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j\;{\lambda{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}\end{matrix} & (22)\end{matrix}$

As a matter of course, z₁(i) of equation (19), z₁(i) of equation (20),z₁(i) of equation (21) and z₁(i) of equation (22) are equal, and z₂(i)of equation (19), z₂(i) of equation (20), z₂(i) of equation (21) andz₂(i) of equation (22) are equal.

Matrix F for weighting synthesis (precoding) is described above.However, each exemplary embodiment herein can also be carried out byusing precoding matrix F (or F(i)) described below.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 23} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & (23) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 24} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\;\pi}\end{pmatrix}}} & (24) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 25} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}} & (25) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 26} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\; 0}\end{pmatrix}}} & (26) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 27} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}} & (27) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 28} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\;\pi} \\e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (28) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 29} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & (29) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 30} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\; 0} \\e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (30)\end{matrix}$

Note that in equation (23), equation (24), equation (25), equation (26),equation (27), equation (28), equation (29), and equation (30), α may bean actual number or may be an imaginary number, and β may be an actualnumber or may be an imaginary number. However, α is not 0 (zero). Then,β is not 0 (zero), either.

Alternatively

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 31} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (31) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 32} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\;\theta} & {\sin\;\theta} \\{\sin\;\theta} & {{- \cos}\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (32) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 33} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (33) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 34} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\;\theta} & {{- \sin}\;\theta} \\{\sin\;\theta} & {\cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (34) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 35} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (35) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 36} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\;\theta} & {{- \cos}\;\theta} \\{\cos\;\theta} & {\sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (36) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 37} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (37) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 38} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\;\theta} & {\cos\;\theta} \\{\cos\;\theta} & {{- \sin}\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & (38)\end{matrix}$

Note that in equation (31), equation (33), equation (35) and equation(37), β may be an actual number or may be an imaginary number. However,β is not 0 (zero).

Alternatively

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 39} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (39) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 40} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (40) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 41} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (41) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 42} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (42) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 43} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (43) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 44} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (44) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 45} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (45) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 46} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (46) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 47} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (47) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 48} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (48) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 49} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (49) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 50} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & (50)\end{matrix}$

Here, each of θ₁₁(i), θ₂₁(i) and λ(i) is a function of i, λ is a fixedvalue, α may be an actual number or may be an imaginary number, and βmay be an actual number or may be an imaginary number. However, α is not0 (zero). Then, β is not 0 (zero), either. Note that i indicates eithertime or a frequency or indicates both time and a frequency.

Alternatively

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{20mu} 51} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & (51) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 52} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & {- \beta}\end{pmatrix}} & (52) \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 53} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & {\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (53) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 54} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & {{- \beta} \times e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (54) \\{or} & \; \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 55} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{- \beta} & 0 \\0 & {\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta{(i)}}}}\end{pmatrix}} & (55)\end{matrix}$

Here, θ(i) is a function of i, and β may be an actual number or may bean imaginary number. However, β is not 0 (zero), either. Note that irepresents either time or a frequency or indicates both time and afrequency.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment herein can also be carried out byusing a precoding matrix other than these matrices.

In addition, there may be a method for performing precoding withoutperforming the above-described phase change, to generate a modulatedsignal and transmit the modulated signal from the transmittingapparatus. In this case, there can be considered an example where z₁(i)and z₂(i) are expressed by the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 56} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (56) \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 57} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (57) \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 58} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {{F\begin{pmatrix}P_{1} & 0 \\0 & P_{2}\end{pmatrix}}\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (58) \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 59} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}Q_{1} & 0 \\0 & Q_{2}\end{pmatrix}{F\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}} & (59) \\\left\lbrack {{Equation}{\;\mspace{14mu}}60} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z_{1}(i)} \\{z_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {F\begin{pmatrix}{s_{1}(i)} \\{s_{2}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & (60)\end{matrix}$

Then, z₁(i) obtained in FIGS. 9 to 17, z₁(i) of equation (56), z₁(i) ofequation (57), z₁(i) of equation (58), z₁(i) of equation (59) or z₁(i)of equation (60) corresponds to modulated signal 1 (113_1) obtainedafter signal processing in FIG. 1, and z₂(i) obtained in FIGS. 9 to 17,z₂(i) of equation (56), z₂(i) of equation (57), z₂(i) of equation (58),z₂(i) of equation (59) or z₂(i) of equation (60) corresponds tomodulated signal 2 (113_2) in FIG. 1.

FIGS. 18 to 22 illustrate examples of a method for arranging z₁(i) andz₂(i) generated in FIGS. 9 to 17.

Part (A) of FIG. 18 illustrates a method for arranging z₁(i), and (B) ofFIG. 18 illustrates a method for arranging z₂(i). In each of (A) and (B)of FIG. 18, a vertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axisindicates a frequency.

Part (A) of FIG. 18 will be described. First, when z₁(0), z₁(1), z₁(2),z₁(3), . . . corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3, . . . are generated,

z₁(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₁(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 1,

z₁(2) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

. . .

z₁(10) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₁(11) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 2,

z₁(12) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2, and

. . .

Similarly, when z₂(0), z₂(1), z₂(2), z₂(3), . . . corresponding to i=0,1, 2, 3, . . . are generated in (B) of FIG. 18,

z₂(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₂(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 1,

z₂(2) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

. . .

z₂(10) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₂(11) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 2,

z₂(12) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2, and

. . .

In this case, z₁(a) and z₂(a) in a case of i=a are transmitted from thesame frequency and from the same time. Then, FIG. 18 illustratesexamples of a case where generated z₁(i) and z₂(i) are preferentiallyarranged in the frequency axis direction.

Part (A) of FIG. 19 illustrates a method for arranging z₁(i), and (B) ofFIG. 19 illustrates a method for arranging z₂(i). In each of (A) and (B)of FIG. 19, a vertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axisindicates a frequency.

Part (A) of FIG. 19 will be described. First, when z₁(0), z₁(1), z₁(2),z₁(3), . . . corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3, . . . are generated,

z₁(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₁(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 2,

z₁ (2) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

. . .

z₁(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₁(11) is arranged at carrier 7 and time 1,

z₁(12) is arranged at carrier 8 and time 2, and

. . .

Similarly, when z₂(0), z₂(1), z₂(2), z₂(3), . . . corresponding to i=0,1, 2, 3, . . . are generated in (B) of FIG. 19,

z₂(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₂(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 2,

z₂(2) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

. . .

z₂(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₂(11) is arranged at carrier 7 and time 1,

z₂(12) is arranged at carrier 8 and time 2, and

. . .

In this case, z₁ (a) and z₂(a) in a case of i=a are transmitted from thesame frequency and from the same time. Then, FIG. 19 illustratesexamples of a case where generated z₁(i) and z₂(i) are randomly arrangedin the frequency axis and time axis directions.

Part (A) of FIG. 20 illustrates a method for arranging z₁(i), and (B) ofFIG. 20 illustrates a method for arranging z₂(i). In each of (A) and (B)of FIG. 20, a vertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axisindicates a frequency.

Part (A) of FIG. 20 will be described. First, when z₁(0), z₁(1), z₁(2),z₁(3), . . . corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3, . . . are generated,

z₁(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₁(1) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

z₁(2) is arranged at carrier 4 and time 1,

. . .

z₁(10) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₁(11) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₁(12) is arranged at carrier 4 and time 2, and

. . .

Similarly, when z₂(0), z₂(1), z₂(2), z₂(3), . . . corresponding to i=0,1, 2, 3, . . . are generated in (B) of FIG. 20,

z₂(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₂(1) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 1,

z₂(2) is arranged at carrier 4 and time 1,

. . .

z₂(10) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₂(11) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₂(12) is arranged at carrier 4 and time 2, and

. . .

In this case, z₁(a) and z₂(a) in a case of i=a are transmitted from thesame frequency and from the same time. Then, FIG. 20 illustratesexamples of a case where generated z₁(i) and z₂(i) are preferentiallyarranged in the frequency axis direction.

Part (A) of FIG. 21 illustrates a method for arranging z₁(i), and (B) ofFIG. 21 illustrates a method for arranging z₂(i). In each of (A) and (B)of FIG. 21, a vertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axisindicates a frequency.

Part (A) of FIG. 21 will be described. First, when z₁(0), z₁(1), z₁(2),z₁(3), . . . corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3, . . . are generated,

z₁(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₁(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 1,

z₁(2) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

. . .

z₁(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₁(11) is arranged at carrier 3 and time 2,

z₁(12) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 3, and

. . .

Similarly, when z₂(0), z₂(1), z₂(2), z₂(3), . . . corresponding to i=0,1, 2, 3, . . . are generated in (B) of FIG. 21,

z₂(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₂(1) is arranged at carrier 1 and time 1,

z₂(2) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

. . .

z₂(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 2,

z₂(11) is arranged at carrier 3 and time 2,

z₂(12) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 3, and

. . .

In this case, z₁(a) and z₂(a) in a case of i=a are transmitted from thesame frequency and from the same time. Then, FIG. 21 illustratesexamples of a case where generated z₁(i) and z₂(i) are arranged in thetime and frequency axis directions.

Part (A) of FIG. 22 illustrates a method for arranging z₁(i), and (B) ofFIG. 22 illustrates a method for arranging z₂(i). In each of (A) and (B)of FIG. 22, a vertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axisindicates a frequency.

Part (A) of FIG. 22 will be described. First, when z₁(0), z₁(1), z₁(2),z₁(3), . . . corresponding to i=0, 1, 2, 3, . . . are generated,

z₁(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₁(1) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₁(2) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 3,

. . .

z₁(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 3,

z₁(11) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 4,

z₁(12) is arranged at carrier 3 and time 1, and

. . .

Similarly, when z₂(0), z₂(1), z₂(2), z₂(3), . . . corresponding to i=0,1, 2, 3, . . . are generated in (B) of FIG. 22,

z₂(0) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 1,

z₂(1) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 2,

z₂(2) is arranged at carrier 0 and time 3,

. . .

z₂(10) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 3,

z₂(11) is arranged at carrier 2 and time 4,

z₂(12) is arranged at carrier 3 and time 1, and

. . .

In this case, z₁ (a) and z₂(a) in a case of i=a are transmitted from thesame frequency and from the same time. Then, FIG. 22 illustratesexamples of a case where generated z₁(i) and z₂(i) are preferentiallyarranged in the time axis direction.

The transmitting apparatus may arrange symbols by any method of themethods in FIGS. 18 to 22 and symbol arranging methods other than themethods in FIGS. 18 to 22. FIGS. 18 to 22 are only examples of symbolarrangement.

FIG. 23 is a configuration example of a receiving apparatus (terminal)which receives a modulated signal transmitted by the transmittingapparatus in FIG. 1.

In FIG. 23, OFDM method related processor 2303_X receives an input ofreceived signal 2302_X received at antenna 2301_X. OFDM method relatedprocessor 2303_X performs reception side signal processing for the OFDMmethod. OFDM method related processor 2303_X outputs signal 2304_Xobtained after the signal processing. Similarly, OFDM method relatedprocessor 2303_Y receives an input of received signal 2302_Y received atantenna 2301_Y. OFDM method related processor 2303_Y performs receptionside signal processing for the OFDM method. OFDM method relatedprocessor 2303_Y outputs signal 2304_Y obtained after the signalprocessing.

First preamble detector/decoder 2311 receives an input of signals 2304_Xand 2304_Y obtained after the signal processing. First preambledetector/decoder 2311 performs signal detection and time-frequencysynchronization by detecting a first preamble, and simultaneouslyobtains control information contained in the first preamble byperforming demodulation and error correction decoding and outputs firstpreamble control information 2312.

Second preamble demodulator 2313 receives an input of signals 2304_X and2304_Y obtained after the signal processing, and first preamble controlinformation 2312. Second preamble demodulator 2313 performs signalprocessing based on first preamble control information 2312. Secondpreamble demodulator 2313 performs demodulation (error correctiondecoding). Second preamble demodulator 2313 outputs second preamblecontrol information 2314.

Control information generator 2315 receives an input of first preamblecontrol information 2312, and second preamble control information 2314.Control information generator 2315 bundles control information (relatedto a receiving operation) and outputs the control information as controlsignal 2316. Then, control signal 2316 is input to each unit asillustrated in FIG. 23.

Modulated signal z₁ channel fluctuation estimator 2305_1 receives aninput of signal 2304_X obtained after the signal processing, and controlsignal 2316. Modulated signal z₁ channel fluctuation estimator 2305_1estimates a channel fluctuation between an antenna from which thetransmitting apparatus has transmitted modulated signal z₁ and receivingantenna 2301_X by using a pilot symbol or the like contained in signal2304_X obtained after the signal processing, and outputs channelestimation signal 2306_1.

Modulated signal z₂ channel fluctuation estimator 2305_2 receives aninput of signal 2304_X obtained after the signal processing, and controlsignal 2316. Modulated signal z₂ channel fluctuation estimator 2305_2estimates a channel fluctuation between an antenna from which thetransmitting apparatus has transmitted modulated signal z₂ and receivingantenna 2301_X by using a pilot symbol or the like contained in signal2304_X obtained after the signal processing, and outputs channelestimation signal 2306_2.

Modulated signal z₁ channel fluctuation estimator 2307_1 receives aninput of signal 2304_Y obtained after the signal processing, and controlsignal 2316. Modulated signal z₁ channel fluctuation estimator 2307_1estimates a channel fluctuation between an antenna from which thetransmitting apparatus has transmitted modulated signal z₁ and receivingantenna 2301_Y by using a pilot symbol or the like contained in signal2304_Y obtained after the signal processing, and outputs channelestimation signal 2308_1.

Modulated signal z₂ channel fluctuation estimator 2307_2 receives aninput of signal 2304_Y obtained after the signal processing, and controlsignal 2316. Modulated signal z₂ channel fluctuation estimator 2307_2estimates a channel fluctuation between an antenna from which thetransmitting apparatus has transmitted modulated signal z₂ and receivingantenna 2301_Y by using a pilot symbol or the like contained in signal2304_Y obtained after the signal processing, and outputs channelestimation signal 2308_2.

Signal processor 2309 receives an input of signals 2306_1, 2306_2,2308_1, 2308_2, 2304_X and 2304_Y, and control signal 2316. Signalprocessor 2309 performs demodulation and decoding processing based oninformation such as a transmitting method, a modulating method, an errorcorrection coding method, a coding rate of error correction coding and ablock size of an error correction code contained in control signal 2316.Signal processor 2309 outputs received data 2310. In this case, otherwave detection (demodulation) and decoding are performed based on theabove-described transmitting method.

Note that the receiving apparatus extracts a necessary symbol fromcontrol signal 2316, and performs demodulation (including signaldemultiplexing and signal wave detection) and error correction decoding.Moreover, a configuration of the receiving apparatus is not limited tothis configuration.

As described above, there is an advantage that flexible videoinformation and flexible broadcast service can be provided to thereceiving apparatus (viewer) by enabling the transmitting apparatus toselect any frame configuration of the frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to6. Moreover, there are the advantages as described above in the frameconfigurations in FIGS. 2 to 6, respectively. Hence, the transmittingapparatus may use a single frame configuration of the frameconfigurations in FIGS. 2 to 6, and, in this case, it is possible toobtain the effect described above.

Moreover, when the transmitting apparatus selects any of the frameconfigurations in FIGS. 2 to 6, for example, when the transmittingapparatus is installed in a certain area, frame configurations may beswitched by setting any of the frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to 6 whenthe transmitting apparatus is installed and regularly reviewing thesetting, or a method for selecting the frame configurations in FIGS. 2to 6 per frame transmission may be employed. As for a frameconfiguration selecting method, any selection may be performed.

Note that in the frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to 6, another symbol,examples of which include a pilot symbol and a null symbol (an in-phasecomponent of the symbol is 0 (zero, and a quadrature component is 0(zero))), may be inserted to the first preamble. Similarly, a symbolsuch as a pilot symbol and a null symbol (an in-phase component of thesymbol is 0 (zero, and a quadrature component is 0 (zero))) may beinserted to a second preamble. Moreover, a preamble is configured withthe first preamble and the second preamble. However, the preambleconfiguration is not limited to this configuration. The preamble may beconfigured with the first preamble (first preamble group) alone or maybe configured with two or more preambles (preamble groups). Note that inregard to the preamble configuration, the same also applies to frameconfigurations of other exemplary embodiments.

Then, the data symbol group is indicated in the frame configurations inFIGS. 2 to 6. However, another symbol, examples of which include a pilotsymbol a null symbol (an in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero,and a quadrature component is 0 (zero))), and a control informationsymbol, may be inserted. Note that in this regard, the same also appliesto frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments.

Moreover, another symbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol, anull symbol (an in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero, and aquadrature component is 0 (zero))), a control information symbol and adata symbol, may be inserted to the pilot symbol in FIG. 6. Note that inthis regard, the same also applies to frame configurations of otherexemplary embodiments.

Second Exemplary Embodiment

The first exemplary embodiment describes the case where the transmittingapparatus selects any of the frame configurations in FIGS. 2 to 6 or thecase where any of the frames in FIGS. 2 to 6 is used. The presentexemplary embodiment will describe an example of the method forconfiguring the first preamble and the second preamble described in thefirst exemplary embodiment, in the transmitting apparatus described inthe first exemplary embodiment.

As described in the first exemplary embodiment, the transmittingapparatus (FIG. 1) may incorporate “information related to a frameconfiguration” for transmitting information related to a frameconfiguration to the receiving apparatus (terminal) in the firstpreamble or the second preamble, to transmit the “information related tothe frame configuration.”

For example, in a case where the transmitting apparatus transmits amodulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 2 when three bitsof v0, v1 and v2 are allocated as the “information related to the frameconfiguration,” the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0,0) and transmits the “information related to the frame configuration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 3, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 0, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 4, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 1, 0) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (0, 1, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 5, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (1, 0, 0) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

The receiving apparatus can learn an outline of a frame configuration ofa modulated signal transmitted by the transmitting apparatus, from the“information related to the frame configuration.”

Further, the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) transmits controlinformation related to a method for transmitting each data symbol group,control information related to a method for modulating each data symbolgroup (or a set of modulating methods), and control information relatedto a code length (block length) and a coding rate of an error correctioncode to be used in each data symbol group, and further transmitsinformation related to a method for configuring a data symbol group ineach frame configuration. An example of the method for configuring thesepieces of control information will be described below.

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 2 or 3 is assumed, that is, it is assumed that thetransmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) or (0,0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, control informationrelated to a method for transmitting data symbol group #j is a(j, 0) anda(j, 1).

In this case, when the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K)is of single stream transmission (SISO (SIMO) transmission), thetransmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 and transmits a(K,0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is of spacetime block codes (or space frequency block codes) (MISO transmission),the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0 and transmitsa(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is MIMO method#1, the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 andtransmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is MIMO method#2, the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1 andtransmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

Note that MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are different methods andare any method of the above-described MIMO methods. Moreover, here, MIMOmethod #1 and MIMO method #2 are used. However, the MIMO method whichthe transmitting apparatus can select may be of one type or may be oftwo or more types.

In FIGS. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsa(1, 0), a(1, 1), a(2, 0), a(2, 1), a(3, 0) and a(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 2 or 3 is assumed, that is, it is assumed that thetransmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) or (0,0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, control informationrelated to a method for modulating data symbol group j is b(j, 0) andb(j, 1).

In this case, a definition described below is made. In a case where thetransmitting method is of single stream transmission (SISO (SIMO)transmission), for example, in a case where a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 areset in data symbol #(j=K),

when b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets adata symbol modulating method to QPSK.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM.

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 64QAM.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 256QAM.

In a case where the transmitting method is of space time block codes (orspace frequency block codes) (MISO transmission), or is MIMO method #1or MIMO method #2, for example, in a case where a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0,a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 or a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1 are set in datasymbol #(j=K),

when b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to QPSK in stream 1 and 16QAM in stream 2.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 16QAM in stream2.

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 64QAM in stream2.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 64QAM in stream 1 and 64QAM in stream2.

Note that the modulating method is not limited to the above-describedmodulating methods. For example, the modulating method may include amodulating method such as an APSK method, non-uniform QAM andnon-uniform mapping. The modulating method will be described in detailbelow.

In FIGS. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsb(1, 0), b(1, 1), b(2, 0), b(2, 1), b(3, 0) and b(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 2 or 3 is assumed, that is, it is assumed that thetransmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) or (0,0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, control informationrelated to a coding method of an error correction code of data symbolgroup #j is c(j, 0) and c(j, 1).

In this case, when an error correction coding method of data symbolgroup #(j=K) is of an error correction code of A and a code length of a,the transmitting apparatus sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)=0 and transmitsc(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofthe error correction code of A and a code length of β, the transmittingapparatus sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)=0 and transmits c(K, 0) and c(K,1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofan error correction code of B and the code length of a, the transmittingapparatus sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)=1 and transmits c(K, 0) and c(K,1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofthe error correction code of B and the code length of β, thetransmitting apparatus sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)=1 and transmits c(K,0) and c(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the error correction code is not limited to thetwo settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset one or more types of error correction codes. The setting of the codelength is not limited to the two settings, and the transmittingapparatus only needs to be able to set two or more code lengths.

In FIGS. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsc(1, 0), c(1, 1), c(2, 0), c(2, 1), c(3, 0) and c(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 2 or 3 is assumed, that is, it is assumed that thetransmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) or (0,0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, control informationrelated to a coding rate of the error correction code of data symbolgroup #j is d(j, 0) and d(j, 1).

In this case, when the coding rate of the error correction code of datasymbol group #(j=K) is ½, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 andd(K, 1)=0 and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#(j=K) is ⅔, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=0 andtransmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#(j=K) is ¾, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=1 andtransmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#(j=K) is 4/5, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=1and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the coding rate of the error correction code isnot limited to the four settings, and the transmitting apparatus onlyneeds to be able to set one or more types of coding rates of the errorcorrection code.

In FIGS. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsd(1, 0), d(1, 1), d(2, 0), d(2, 1), d(3, 0) and d(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 2 or 3 is assumed, that is, it is assumed that thetransmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 0, 0) or (0,0, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, information related to anumber of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #j is e(j, 0) and e(j,1).

In this case, when the number of symbols in the frame of data symbolgroup #(j=K) is of 256 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K,0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0 and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 512 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 1024 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 2048 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the number of symbols is not limited to thefour settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset one or more types of the number of symbols.

In FIGS. 2 and 3, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitse(1, 0), e(1, 1), e(2, 0), e(2, 1), e(3, 0) and e(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, controlinformation related to a method for transmitting data symbol group #j isa(j, 0) and a(j, 1).

In this case, when the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K)is of single stream transmission (SISO (SIMO) transmission), thetransmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 and transmits a(K,0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is of spacetime block codes (or space frequency block codes) (MISO transmission),the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0 and transmitsa(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is MIMO method#1, the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 andtransmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

When the method for transmitting data symbol group #(j=K) is MIMO method#2, the transmitting apparatus sets a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1 andtransmits a(K, 0) and a(K, 1).

Note that MIMO method #1 and MIMO method #2 are different methods andare any method of the above-described MIMO methods. Moreover, here, MIMOmethod #1 and MIMO method #2 are used. However, the MIMO method whichthe transmitting apparatus can select may be of one type or may be oftwo or more types.

In FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsa(1, 0), a(1, 1), a(2, 0), a(2, 1), a(3, 0) and a(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, controlinformation related to a method for modulating data symbol group j isb(j, 0) and b(j, 1).

In this case, a definition described below is made. In a case where thetransmitting method is of single stream transmission (SISO (SIMO)transmission), for example, in a case where a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=0 areset in data symbol #(j=K), when b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, thetransmitting apparatus sets a data symbol modulating method to QPSK.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM.

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 64QAM.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 256QAM.

In a case where the transmitting method is of space time block codes (orspace frequency block codes) (MISO transmission), or is MIMO method #1or MIMO method #2, for example, in a case where a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=0,a(K, 0)=0 and a(K, 1)=1 or a(K, 0)=1 and a(K, 1)=1 are set in datasymbol #0=K), when b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmittingapparatus sets the data symbol modulating method to QPSK in stream 1 and16QAM in stream 2.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=0 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 16QAM in stream2.

When b(K, 0)=0 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 16QAM in stream 1 and 64QAM in stream2.

When b(K, 0)=1 and b(K, 1)=1 hold, the transmitting apparatus sets thedata symbol modulating method to 64QAM in stream 1 and 64QAM in stream2.

Note that the modulating method is not limited to the above-describedmodulating methods. For example, the modulating method may include amodulating method such as an APSK method, non-uniform QAM andnon-uniform mapping. The modulating method will be described in detailbelow.

In FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsb(1, 0), b(1, 1), b(2, 0), b(2, 1), b(3, 0) and b(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, controlinformation related to a coding method of an error correction code ofdata symbol group #j is c(j, 0) and c(j, 1).

In this case, when an error correction coding method of data symbolgroup #(j=K) is of an error correction code of A and a code length of α,the transmitting apparatus sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)=0 and transmitsc(K, 0) and c(K, 1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofthe error correction code of A and a code length of 13, the transmittingapparatus sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)=0 and transmits c(K, 0) and c(K,1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofan error correction code of B and the code length of α, the transmittingapparatus sets c(K, 0)=0 and c(K, 1)=1 and transmits c(K, 0) and c(K,1).

When an error correction coding method of data symbol group #(j=K) is ofthe error correction code of B and a code length of β, the transmittingapparatus sets c(K, 0)=1 and c(K, 1)=1 and transmits c(K, 0) and c(K,1).

Note that the setting of the error correction code is not limited to thetwo settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset one or more types of error correction codes. The setting of the codelength is not limited to the two settings, and the transmittingapparatus only needs to be able to set two or more code lengths.

In FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsc(1, 0), c(1, 1), c(2, 0), c(2, 1), c(3, 0) and c(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2). In this case, controlinformation related to a coding rate of the error correction code ofdata symbol group #j is d(j, 0) and d(j, 1).

In this case, when the coding rate of the error correction code of datasymbol group #(j=K) is ½, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 andd(K, 1)=0 and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#(j=K) is ⅔, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=0 andtransmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#(j=K) is ¾, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=0 and d(K, 1)=1 andtransmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

When the coding rate of the error correction code of data symbol group#0=K) is 4/5, the transmitting apparatus sets d(K, 0)=1 and d(K, 1)=1and transmits d(K, 0) and d(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the coding rate of the error correction code isnot limited to the four settings, and the transmitting apparatus onlyneeds to be able to set two or more types of coding rates of the errorcorrection code.

In FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, since there are data symbol group #1, data symbolgroup #2 and data symbol group #3, the transmitting apparatus transmitsd(1, 0), d(1, 1), d(2, 0), d(2, 1), d(3, 0) and d(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmit (v0, v1, v2).

In this case, when there is a mix of a plurality of data symbol groupsin a certain time interval like data symbol group #1 and data symbolgroup #2 of the frames in FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, this time interval can beset. (A unit time in the time interval in which there is the mix of aplurality of data symbol groups may be referred to as an OFDM symbol.)Information related to this time interval is f(0) and f(1).

In this case, when this time interval is of 128 OFDM symbols, thetransmitting apparatus sets f(0)=0 and f(1)=0 and transmits f(0) andf(1).

When this time interval is of 256 OFDM symbols, the transmittingapparatus sets f(0)=1 and f(1)=0 and transmits f(0) and f(1).

When this time interval is of 512 OFDM symbols, the transmittingapparatus sets f(0)=0 and f(1)=1 and transmits f(0) and f(1).

When this time interval is of 1024 OFDM symbols, the transmittingapparatus sets f(0)=1 and f(1)=0 and transmits f(0) and f(1).

Note that the setting of the time interval is not limited to the foursettings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able to settwo or more types of the time intervals.

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2).

In this case, when there is no other data symbol group in a certain timeinterval like data symbol group #3 in FIG. 4, 5 or 6, informationrelated to the number of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #j ise(j, 0) and e(j, 1). However, for example, when there is data symbolgroup #4 immediately after data symbol group #3, there may be a mix ofdata symbols of data symbol group #3 and data symbols of data symbolgroup #4 in a certain time interval at a portion at which data symbolgroup #3 and data symbol group #4 are adjacent.

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 256 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 512 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 1024 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 2048 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the number of symbols is not limited to thefour settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset two or more types of the number of symbols.

In FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, since data symbol group #3 corresponds to theabove, the transmitting apparatus transmits e(3, 0) and e(3, 1).

A case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 4, 5, or 6 is assumed, that is, it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (0, 1, 0), (0,1, 1) or (1, 0, 0) and transmits (v0, v1, v2).

In this case, when there is a mix of a plurality of data symbol groupsin a certain time interval like data symbol group #1 and data symbolgroup #2 of the frames in FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, a number of carriers to beused by each data symbol group can be set.

In this case, information related to the number of carriers is g(0) andg(1). For example, a total number of carriers is of 512 carriers.

When the number of carriers of a first data symbol group is of 480carriers and the number of carriers of a second symbol group is of 32carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=0 and g(1)=0 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 448carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 64carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=1 and g(1)=0 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 384carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 128carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=0 and g(1)=1 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 256carriers and the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 256carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=1 and g(1)=1 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

Note that the setting of the number of carriers is not limited to thefour settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset two or more types of the number of carriers.

The case where there is a mix of two data symbol groups is describedwith reference to FIGS. 4 to 6 as an example of a case where there is amix of a plurality of data symbol groups in a certain time interval.However, there may be a mix of three or more data symbol groups. Thispoint will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25 and 26.

FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in a case wherethere are three data symbol groups in a certain time interval, incontrast to FIG. 4. Elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 4 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 24 and will not bedescribed.

FIG. 24 illustrates data symbol group #1 2401, data symbol group #22402, and data symbol group #4 2403, and there are data symbol group #1,data symbol group #2 and data symbol group #4 in a certain timeinterval.

FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in a case wherethere are three data symbol groups in a certain time interval, incontrast to FIG. 5. Elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 5 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 25 and will not bedescribed.

FIG. 25 illustrates data symbol group #1 2501, data symbol group #22502, and data symbol group #5 2503, and there are data symbol group #1,data symbol group #2 and data symbol group #4 in a certain timeinterval.

FIG. 26 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in a case wherethere are three data symbol groups in a certain time interval, incontrast to FIG. 6. Elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 6 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 26 and will not bedescribed.

FIG. 26 illustrates data symbol group #1 2601, data symbol group #22602, and data symbol group #4 2603, and there are data symbol group #1,data symbol group #2 and data symbol group #4 in a certain timeinterval.

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 may be able to select the frameconfigurations in FIGS. 24 to 26. Moreover, a frame configuration wherethere are four or more data symbol groups in a certain time interval, incontrast to FIGS. 4 to 6 and 24 to 26 may be employed.

FIGS. 24, 25 and 26 illustrate the examples where a data symbol groupsubjected to time division is arranged after a data symbol groupsubjected to frequency division. However, the arrangement is not limitedto this arrangement. The data symbol group subjected to frequencydivision may be arranged after the data symbol group subjected to timedivision. In this case, in the example in FIG. 25, the first preambleand the second preamble are inserted between the data symbol groupsubjected to time division and the data symbol group subjected tofrequency division. However, symbols other than the first preamble andthe second preamble may be inserted. Then, in the example in FIG. 26,the pilot symbol is inserted between the data symbol group subjected totime division and the data symbol group subjected to frequency division.However, symbols other than the pilot symbol may be inserted.

Note that in a case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) transmitsa modulated signal with the frame configuration in FIG. 24 when thetransmitting apparatus incorporates “information related to a frameconfiguration” for transmitting information related to a frameconfiguration to the receiving apparatus (terminal) in the firstpreamble or the second preamble and transmits the “information relatedto the frame configuration,” for example, when three bits of v0, v1 andv2 are allocated as the “information related to the frameconfiguration,” the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1,0, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 25, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (1, 1, 0) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

When the transmitting apparatus transmits a modulated signal with theframe configuration in FIG. 26, the transmitting apparatus sets (v0, v1,v2) to (1, 1, 1) and transmits the “information related to the frameconfiguration.”

Note that in FIGS. 24, 25 and 26, a data symbol group may also be asymbol group based on the MIMO (transmitting) method and the MISO(transmitting) method (as a matter of course, the data symbol group maybe a symbol group of the SISO (SIMO) method.). In this case, at the sametime and the same (common) frequency, a plurality of streams (s1 and s2described below) is transmitted. In this case, at the same time and thesame (common) frequency, a plurality of modulated signals is transmittedfrom a plurality of (different) antennas.

Then, a case where the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) selects the frameconfiguration in FIG. 24, 25, or 26 is assumed, that is, it is assumedthat the transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) sets (v0, v1, v2) to (1, 0, 1),(1, 1, 0) or (1, 1, 1) and transmits (v0, v1, v2).

In this case, when there is a mix of a plurality of data symbol groupsin a certain time interval like data symbol group #1, data symbol group#2 and data symbol group #4 of the frames in FIGS. 24, 25 and 26, anumber of carriers to be used by each data symbol group can be set.

In this case, information related to the number of carriers is g(0) andg(1). For example, a total number of carriers is of 512 carriers.

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 448carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 32carriers and the number of carriers of a third symbol group is of 32carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=0 and g(1)=0 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 384carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 64carriers and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is of 64carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=1 and g(1)=0 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 256carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 128carriers and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is of 128carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=0 and g(1)=1 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

When the number of carriers of the first data symbol group is of 480carriers, the number of carriers of the second symbol group is of 16carriers and the number of carriers of the third symbol group is of 16carriers among the two data symbol groups, the transmitting apparatussets g(0)=1 and g(1)=1 and transmits g(0) and g(1).

Note that the setting of the number of carriers is not limited to thefour settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset one or more types of the number of carriers.

Moreover, an effect of improvement in data transmission efficiency canbe obtained when in frames in which there is a mix of a “case wherethere is a mix of a plurality of data symbol groups in a first timeinterval” and a “case where there is only one data symbol group in asecond time interval” as in FIGS. 4, 5, 6, 24, 25 and 26, thetransmitting apparatus can separately set a carrier interval (an FFT(Fast Fourier Transform) size or a Fourier transform size) in the “casewhere there is the mix of a plurality of data symbol groups in the firsttime interval,” and a carrier interval (an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform)size or a Fourier transform size) in the “case where there is only onedata symbol group in the second time interval.” This is because thecarrier interval appropriate in terms of data transmission efficiency inthe “case where there is the mix of a plurality of data symbol groups inthe first time interval,” and the carrier interval appropriate in termsof data transmission efficiency in the “case where there is only onedata symbol group in the second time interval” are different.

Hence, control information related to a carrier interval related to the“case where there is the mix of a plurality of data symbol groups in thefirst time interval” is ha(0) and ha(1).

In this case, when the carrier interval is 0.25 kHz, the transmittingapparatus sets ha(0)=0 and ha(1)=0, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

When the carrier interval is 0.5 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setsha(0)=1 and ha(1)=0, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

When the carrier interval is 1 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setsha(0)=0 and ha(1)=1, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

When the carrier interval is 2 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setsha(0)=1 and ha(1)=1, and transmits ha(0) and ha(1).

Note that the setting of the carrier interval is not limited to the foursettings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able to settwo or more types of the carrier intervals.

Then, control information related to a carrier interval related to the“case where there is only one data symbol group in the second timeinterval” is hb(0) and hb(1).

In this case, when the carrier interval is 0.25 kHz, the transmittingapparatus sets hb(0)=0 and hb(1)=0, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

When the carrier interval is 0.5 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setshb(0)=1 and hb(1)=0, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

When the carrier interval is 1 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setshb(0)=0 and hb(1)=1, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

When the carrier interval is 2 kHz, the transmitting apparatus setshb(0)=1 and hb(1)=1, and transmits hb(0) and hb(1).

Note that the setting of the carrier interval is not limited to the foursettings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able to settwo or more types of the carrier intervals.

Here, set values of the carrier interval selectable in any of the “casewhere there is the mix of a plurality of data symbol groups in the firsttime interval” and the “case where there is only one data symbol groupin the second time interval” are made the same such that the set valuesof the carrier interval in the “case where there is the mix of aplurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval” are 0.25kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz and the set values of the carrier intervalin the “case where there is only one data symbol group in the secondtime interval” are 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz. However, a set ofset values selectable in the “case where there is the mix of a pluralityof data symbol groups in the first time interval” and a set of setvalues selectable in the “case where there is only one data symbol groupin the second time interval” may be different. For example, the setvalues of the carrier interval in the “case where there is the mix of aplurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval” may be 0.25kHz, 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz, and the set values of the carrierinterval in the “case where there is only one data symbol group in thesecond time interval” may be 0.125 kHz, 0.25 kHz, 0.5 kHz and 1 kHz.Note that the settable values are not limited to this example.

Note that there can be considered a method for transmitting controlinformation ha(0) and ha(1) related to the carrier interval related tothe “case where there is the mix of a plurality of data symbol groups inthe first time interval,” and control information hb(0) and hb(1)related to the carrier interval related to the “case where there is onlyone data symbol group in the second time interval” with any of the firstpreamble and the second preamble in FIGS. 4, 5, 6, 24, 25 and 26.

For example, in FIGS. 4, 6, 24 and 26, there can be considered a methodfor transmitting control information ha(0) and ha(1) related to thecarrier interval related to the “case where there is the mix of aplurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval,” and controlinformation hb(0) and hb(1) related to the carrier interval related tothe “case where there is only one data symbol group in the second timeinterval” with first preamble 201 or second preamble 202.

In FIGS. 5 and 25, there can be considered a method for transmittingcontrol information ha(0) and ha(1) related to the carrier intervalrelated to the “case where there is the mix of a plurality of datasymbol groups in the first time interval” with first preamble 201 orsecond preamble 202, and transmitting control information hb(0) andhb(1) related to the carrier interval related to the “case where thereis only one data symbol group in the second time interval” with firstpreamble 501 or second preamble 502.

Moreover, as another method, in FIGS. 5 and 25, a method fortransmitting a plurality of times control information ha(0) and ha(1)related to the carrier interval related to the “case where there is themix of a plurality of data symbol groups in the first time interval,”and control information hb(0) and hb(1) related to the carrier intervalrelated to the “case where there is only one data symbol group in thesecond time interval,” such that ha(0) and ha(1), and hb(0) and hb(1)are transmitted with “first preamble 201 or second preamble 202” andwith “first preamble 501 or second preamble 502” may be employed. Inthis case, for example, the receiving apparatus which is to receive onlydata of data symbol group #1 and the receiving apparatus which is toreceive only data of data symbol group # can learn situations of allframes. Consequently, it is possible to easily and stably operate bothof the receiving apparatuses.

As a matter of course, the receiving apparatus (for example, FIG. 23)which receives a modulated signal transmitted by the transmittingapparatus in FIG. 1 receives the above-described control information,demodulates and decodes a data symbol group based on this controlinformation and obtains information.

As described above, the information described in the present exemplaryembodiment is transmitted as control information, and thus it ispossible to obtain an effect of enabling improvement in data receptionquality and improvement in data transmission efficiency and of enablingan accurate operation of the receiving apparatus.

Note that the frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted bythe transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is described in the first exemplaryembodiment and the second exemplary embodiment with reference to FIGS.3, 4, 5 and 6, but arrangement of data symbol group #1 and data symbolgroup #2 on the frequency axis in FIGS. 4, 5 and 6 is not limited tothis arrangement, and for example, data symbol group #1 and data symbolgroup #2 may be arranged like data symbol group #1 (2701) and datasymbol group #2 (2702) in FIGS. 27, 28 and 29. Note that in each ofFIGS. 27, 28 and 29, a horizontal axis indicates time, and a verticalaxis indicates a frequency.

Then, a method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2)in the frame configuration in FIG. 5 and a method for transmitting datasymbol group #2 (402) may be set with first preamble 201 and/or secondpreamble 202. A method for transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) maybe set with first preamble 501 and/or second preamble 502.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting datasymbol group #2 (402) are of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402)are of SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, andeither a case where the “method for transmitting data symbol group #3(403) is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a next “set of the first preamble and the second preamble” is ofeither “MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission(SIMO transmission),” and in the method for transmitting a plurality ofdata symbol groups present between the “set of the first preamble andthe second preamble” and the next “set of the first preamble and thesecond preamble,” there is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission) and there is no mix of MISOtransmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, a fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. Note thatwhen there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency ofinserting a pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the datatransmission efficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilotsymbol to be inserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Note that pilot symbol 4102 ishighly likely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Similarly, in the frame configuration in FIG. 25, a method fortransmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), a method for transmitting datasymbol group #2 (2502) and a method for transmitting data symbol group#4 (2503) may be set with first preamble 201 and/or second preamble 202,and a method for transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) may be set withfirst preamble 501 and/or second preamble 502.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol group #1 (2501), the method for transmitting data symbol group #2(2502) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503) areof MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the “methodfor transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), the method fortransmitting data symbol group #2 (2502) and the method for transmittingdata symbol group #4 (2503) are of SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission)” may be selectable, and either a case where the “methodfor transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) is of MIMO transmission orMISO transmission” or a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol group #3 (403) is of SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” maybe selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a next “set of the first preamble and the second preamble” is ofeither “MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission(SIMO transmission),” and in the method for transmitting a plurality ofdata symbol groups present between the “set of the first preamble andthe second preamble” and the next “set of the first preamble and thesecond preamble,” there is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission) and there is no mix of MISOtransmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, a fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method.

Note that when there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method andthe MIMO (MISO) transmitting method, there is a possibility thatfrequency of inserting a pilot symbol becomes excessive and that thedata transmission efficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of apilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is highlylikely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Moreover, in the frame configuration in FIG. 6, a method fortransmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2), a method fortransmitting data symbol group #2 (402) and a method for transmittingdata symbol group #3 (403) may be set with first preamble 201 and/orsecond preamble 202.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 (401_1 and 401_2) and the method for transmitting datasymbol group #2 (402) are of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 (401_1and 401_2) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #2 (402)are of SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, andeither a case where the “method for transmitting data symbol group #3(403) is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a “pilot symbol” is of either “MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thus, there isno mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of datasymbol groups present between the “pilot symbol” and a next “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” is of either “MIMO transmissionor MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thus,there is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission) and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission). However, FIG. 6 does not illustratethe “set of the first preamble and the second preamble” next to thepilot symbol.

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is highlylikely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Similarly, a method for transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501) in theframe configuration in FIG. 26, a method for transmitting data symbolgroup #2 (2502), a method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503)and a method for transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) may be set withfirst preamble 201 and/or second preamble 202.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol group #1 (2501), the method for transmitting data symbol group #2(2502) and the method for transmitting data symbol group #4 (2503) areof MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the “methodfor transmitting data symbol group #1 (2501), the method fortransmitting data symbol group #2 (2502) and the method for transmittingdata symbol group #4 (2503) are of SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission)” may be selectable, and either a case where the “methodfor transmitting data symbol group #3 (403) is of MIMO transmission orMISO transmission” or a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol group #3 (403) is of SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” maybe selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a “pilot symbol” is of either “MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thus, there isno mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of datasymbol groups present between the “pilot symbol” and a next “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” is of either “MIMO transmissionor MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thereis no mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). However, FIG. 6 does not illustrate the “set of the firstpreamble and the second preamble” next to the pilot symbol.

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement of data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is highlylikely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Third Exemplary Embodiment

The first exemplary embodiment and the second exemplary embodimentdescribe the MIMO transmitting method using precoding and phase changefor transmitting a plurality of streams by using a plurality ofantennas, and the MISO (Multiple-Input Single-Output) transmittingmethod using space time block codes or space frequency block codes fortransmitting a plurality of streams by using a plurality of antennas. Anexample of a method for transmitting preambles in a case where it isconsidered that a transmitting apparatus transmits modulated signals bythese transmitting methods will be described. Note that the MIMOtransmitting method may be the MIMO transmitting method which does notperform phase change.

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 includes antenna 126_1 and antenna126_2. In this case, as an antenna configuring method which is highlylikely to be easy to demultiplex two modulated signals to betransmitted, there is a method in which

“antenna 126_1 is a horizontal polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 isa vertical polarizing antenna,”

or

“antenna 126_1 is a vertical polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 is ahorizontal polarizing antenna,”

or

“antenna 126_1 is a clockwise rotation round polarization antenna, andantenna 126_2 is a counterclockwise rotation round polarizationantenna,”

or

“antenna 126_1 is a counterclockwise rotation round polarizationantenna, and antenna 126_2 is a clockwise rotation round polarizationantenna.”

Such an antenna configuring method will be referred to as a firstantenna configuring method.

Moreover, an antenna configuring method other than the first antennaconfiguring method will be referred to as a second antenna configuringmethod. Hence, examples of the second antenna configuring method includemethods in which

“antenna 126_1 is a horizontal polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 isa horizontal polarizing antenna,”

and

“antenna 126_1 is a vertical polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 is avertical polarizing antenna,”

“antenna 126_1 is a counterclockwise rotation round polarizationantenna, and antenna 126_2 is a counterclockwise rotation roundpolarization antenna,”

and

“antenna 126_1 is a clockwise rotation round polarization antenna, andantenna 126_2 is a clockwise rotation round polarization antenna.”

Each transmitting apparatus (FIG. 1) is settable in the first antennaconfiguring method in which, for example, “antenna 126_1 is thehorizontal polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 is the verticalpolarizing antenna” or “antenna 126_1 is the vertical polarizingantenna, and antenna 126_2 is the horizontal polarizing antenna”,

or

the second antenna configuring method in which, for example, “antenna126_1 is the horizontal polarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 is thehorizontal polarizing antenna” or “antenna 126_1 is the verticalpolarizing antenna, and antenna 126_2 is the vertical polarizingantenna”. For example, in a broadcast system, any antenna configuringmethod of the first antenna configuring method and the second antennaconfiguring method is adopted depending on a place to install thetransmitting apparatus (installation area).

In such an antenna configuring method, a method for configuring a firstpreamble and a second preamble in a case of the frame configuringmethods, for example, in FIGS. 2 to 6, and 24 to 26 will be described.

As with the second exemplary embodiment, the transmitting apparatustransmits control information related to the antenna configuring methodby using the first preamble. In this case, the information related tothe antenna configuring method is m(0) and m(1).

In this case, when in two transmitting antennas of the transmittingapparatus, a first transmitting antenna is a horizontal polarizingantenna and thus transmits a horizontally polarized first modulatedsignal and a second transmitting antenna is a horizontal polarizingantenna and thus transmits a horizontally polarized second modulatedsignal), the transmitting apparatus sets m(0)=0 and m(1)=0, andtransmits m(0) and m(1).

When in the two transmitting antennas of the transmitting apparatus, thefirst transmitting antenna is a vertical polarizing antenna and thustransmits a vertically polarized first modulated signal and the secondtransmitting antenna is a vertical polarizing antenna and thus transmitsa vertically polarized second modulated signal, the transmittingapparatus sets m(0)=1 and m(1)=0, and transmits m(0) and m(1).

When in the two transmitting antennas of the transmitting apparatus, thefirst transmitting antenna is a horizontal polarizing antenna and thustransmits a horizontally polarized first modulated signal and the secondtransmitting antenna is a vertical polarizing antenna and thus transmitsa vertically polarized second modulated signal, the transmittingapparatus sets m(0)=0 and m(1)=1, and transmits m(0) and m(1).

When in the two transmitting antennas of the transmitting apparatus, thefirst transmitting antenna is a vertical polarizing antenna and thustransmits a vertically polarized first modulated signal) and the secondtransmitting antenna is a horizontal polarizing antenna and thustransmits a horizontally polarized second modulated signal), thetransmitting apparatus sets m(0)=1 and m(1)=1, and transmits m(0) andm(1).

Then, the transmitting apparatus transmits m(0) and m(1) with, forexample, the first preamble in the frame configuring method in FIGS. 2to 6 and 24 to 26. Consequently, a receiving apparatus receives thefirst preamble and demodulates and decodes the first preamble, and thusthe receiving apparatus can easily learn what polarized wave is used totransmit a modulated signal (for example, the second preamble and thedata symbol group) transmitted by the transmitting apparatus.Consequently, it is possible to accurately set an antenna (including useof a polarized wave) to be used by the receiving apparatus duringreception. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect of making itpossible to obtain a high reception gain (high reception fieldintensity). There is also an advantage that it becomes unnecessary toperform signal processing for reception which has a small effect ofobtaining a gain. Consequently, it is possible to obtain an advantagethat data reception quality improves.

The above describes the point that “there is also an advantage that itbecomes unnecessary to perform signal processing for reception which hasa small effect of obtaining a gain.” Supplemental description will bemade on this point.

A case where the transmitting apparatus transmits modulated signals onlywith horizontally polarized waves and the receiving apparatus includes ahorizontal polarizing receiving antenna and a vertical polarizingreceiving antenna will be discussed. In this case, the modulated signalstransmitted by the transmitting apparatus can be received at thehorizontal polarizing receiving antenna of the receiving apparatus.However, the vertical polarizing receiving antenna of the receivingapparatus has very small reception field intensity of the modulatedsignals transmitted by the transmitting apparatus.

Hence, in such a case, when power consumed by the signal processing isconsidered, it is less necessary to perform an operation of performingsignal processing on received signals received at the verticalpolarizing receiving antenna of the receiving apparatus and obtainingdata.

In view of the above, it is necessary for the transmitting apparatus totransmit “control information related to an antenna configuring method,”and for the receiving apparatus to perform accurate control.

Next, a case where the transmitting apparatus includes two or morehorizontal polarizing antennas, yet, it does not necessarily mean thatthe transmitting apparatus does not include a vertical polarizingantenna, or a case where the transmitting apparatus includes two or morevertical polarizing antennas, yet, it does not necessarily mean that thetransmitting apparatus does not include a horizontal polarizing antennawill be described.

<Case where Transmitting Apparatus Includes Two or More HorizontalPolarizing Antennas>

In this case, when the transmitting apparatus transmits a single streamusing the SISO transmitting method or the SIMO transmitting method, thetransmitting apparatus transmits modulated signals from one or morehorizontal polarizing antennas. In consideration of this case, when thetransmitting apparatus transmits the first preamble including thecontrol information related to the antenna configuring method describedabove, from one or more horizontal polarizing antennas, the receivingapparatus can receive the first preamble including the controlinformation related to the antenna configuring method with a high gain,and, consequently, can obtain high data reception quality.

Then, the receiving apparatus obtains the control information related tothe antenna configuring method, and thus the receiving apparatus canlearn antenna configuration with which the transmitting apparatus hastransmitted the MIMO transmitting method and the MISO transmittingmethod.

<Case where Transmitting Apparatus Includes Two or More VerticalPolarizing Antennas>

In this case, when the transmitting apparatus transmits a single streamusing the SISO transmitting method or the SIMO transmitting method, thetransmitting apparatus transmits modulated signals from one or morevertical polarizing antennas. In consideration of this case, when thetransmitting apparatus transmits the first preamble including thecontrol information related to the antenna configuring method describedabove, from one or more vertical polarizing antennas, the receivingapparatus can receive the first preamble including the controlinformation related to the antenna configuring method with a high gainand, consequently, can obtain high data reception quality.

Then, the receiving apparatus obtains the control information related tothe antenna configuring method, and thus the receiving apparatus canlearn antenna configuration with which the transmitting apparatus hastransmitted the MIMO transmitting method and the MISO transmittingmethod.

Next, a case where the transmitting apparatus includes a horizontalpolarizing antenna and a vertical polarizing antenna will be described.

In this case, when the transmitting apparatus transmits a single streamusing the SISO transmitting method or the SIMO transmitting method, itcan be considered that the transmitting apparatus

a first method:

transmits modulated signals from the horizontal polarizing antenna andthe vertical polarizing antenna,

a second method:

transmits modulated signals from the horizontal polarizing antenna,

a third method:

transmits modulated signals from the vertical polarizing antenna.

In this case, transmission from an antenna used for transmitting thefirst preamble including the control information related to the antennaconfiguring method described above is performed by the same method as ina case of transmission from an antenna used for transmitting a singlestream using the SISO transmitting method or the SIMO transmittingmethod.

Hence, when modulated signals are transmitted by the first method intransmission of a single stream using the SISO transmitting method orthe SIMO transmitting method, the first preamble including the controlinformation related to the antenna configuring method is transmittedfrom the horizontal polarizing antenna and the vertical polarizingantenna.

When modulated signals are transmitted by the second method, the firstpreamble including the control information related to the antennaconfiguring method is transmitted from the horizontal polarizingantenna.

When modulated signals are transmitted by the third method, the firstpreamble including the control information related to the antennaconfiguring method is transmitted from the vertical polarizing antenna.

In this way, there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus canreceive the first preamble in the same way as in receiving data symbolgroups transmitted by the SISO method, that is, it becomes unnecessaryto change a signal processing method according to a transmitting method.Note that it is also possible to obtain the above-described advantage.

Then, the receiving apparatus obtains the control information related tothe antenna configuring method, and thus the receiving apparatus canlearn antenna configuration with which the transmitting apparatus hastransmitted the MIMO transmitting method and the MISO transmittingmethod.

As described above, the first preamble including the control informationrelated to the antenna configuring method is transmitted, and thus thereceiving apparatus can receive the first preamble with a high gain.Consequently, it is possible to obtain an effect of improvement in datasymbol group reception quality, and it is possible to obtain an effectof enabling improvement in power efficiency of the receiving apparatus.

Note that the case where the control information related to the antennaconfiguring method is contained in the first preamble is described aboveas an example, but even when the control information related to theantenna configuring method is not contained in the first preamble, it ispossible to obtain the same effect.

Then, the antenna used for transmitting the first preamble is highlylikely to be determined during installation or maintenance of thetransmitting apparatus, and a change in an antenna to be used during anoperation can also be made, but such a change is less likely to befrequently made during a practical operation.

Fourth Exemplary Embodiment

The example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is described in theabove-described exemplary embodiments. A frame configuration in amodulated signal to be transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG.1 will be further described in the present exemplary embodiment.

FIG. 30 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as in FIG. 2 are assigned the same referencenumerals in FIG. 30 and will not be described. In FIG. 30, a verticalaxis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then,since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier such as an OFDM methodis used, there is a plurality of carriers on the vertical axisfrequency.

FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #1 3001, data symbol group #2 3002and data symbol group #3 3003. There are data symbol group #1 (3001),data symbol group #2 (3002) and data symbol group #3 (3003) from time t1to time t2, and, at every time, there is a plurality of data symbolgroups.

Similarly, FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #4 3004, data symbolgroup #5 3005 and data symbol group #6 3006. There are data symbol group#4 (3004), data symbol group #5 (3005) and data symbol group #6 (3006)from time t2 and time t3, and, at every time, there is a plurality ofdata symbol groups.

Then, FIG. 30 illustrates data symbol group #7 3007, data symbol group#8 3008 and data symbol group #9 3009. There are data symbol group #7(3007), data symbol group #8 (3008) and data symbol group #9 (3009) fromtime t3 to time t4, and, at every time, there is a plurality of datasymbol groups.

In this case, a number of carriers to be used in each data symbol groupcan be set. The number of symbol groups existing at every time is notlimited to three. There only need to be two or more symbol groups.

Note that a data symbol group may also be a symbol group based on theMIMO (transmitting) method and the MISO (transmitting) method. As amatter of course, the data symbol group may be a symbol group of theSISO (SIMO) method. In this case, at the same time and the same (common)frequency, a plurality of streams (s1 and s2 described below) istransmitted. In this case, at the same time and the same (common)frequency, a plurality of modulated signals is transmitted from aplurality of (different) antennas. Then, this point is not limited toFIG. 30, and the same also applies to FIGS. 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37and 38.

Characteristic points in FIG. 30 are such that frequency division isperformed, and that there are two or more time sections in which thereis a plurality of data symbol groups. Consequently, there is an effectof enabling symbol groups of different data reception quality to existat the same time, and of enabling a flexible setting of a datatransmission rate by appropriately defining data sections.

FIG. 31 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as in FIGS. 2 and 30 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 31 and will not be described. In FIG. 31, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier such as anOFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on the verticalaxis frequency.

FIG. 31 illustrates data symbol group #10 3101 and data symbol group #113102, and there are data symbol group #10 (3101) and data symbol group#11 (3102) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, temporal division isperformed and there is a plurality of data symbol groups.

Characteristic points in FIG. 31 are such that frequency division isperformed and there are two or more time sections in which there is aplurality of data symbol groups, and that temporal division is performedand there is a plurality of data symbols. Consequently, there is aneffect of enabling symbol groups of different data reception quality toexist at the same time, and of enabling a flexible setting of a datatransmission rate by appropriately defining data sections, and also ofenabling a flexible setting of a data transmission rate by performingtemporal division and appropriately defining data sections.

FIG. 32 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIGS. 2, 30 and 5 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 32 and will not be described. In FIG. 32, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier methodsuch as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on thevertical axis frequency.

FIG. 32 illustrates data symbol group #7 3201 and data symbol group #83202, and there are data symbol group #7 (3201) and data symbol group #8(3202) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, temporal division isperformed and there is a plurality of data symbol groups.

A difference from FIG. 31 is that first preamble 501 and second preamble502 are arranged before data symbol group #7 (3201). In this case,control information related to data symbol groups #1 to #6 subjected tofrequency division, examples of which include a number of carriers and atime interval which are necessary for each data symbol group, a methodfor modulating each data symbol group, a method for transmitting eachdata symbol group and a method of an error correction code to be used ineach data symbol group, is transmitted with first preamble 201 and/orsecond preamble 202 in FIG. 32. Note that the example of controlinformation is described in the second exemplary embodiment. Note thatthis point will be described additionally.

Then, control information related to data symbol groups #7 and #8subjected to temporal division, examples of which include a number ofsymbols (or a time interval) which are necessary for each data symbolgroup, a method for modulating each data symbol group, a method fortransmitting each data symbol group and a method of an error correctioncode to be used in each data symbol group, is transmitted with firstpreamble 501 and/or second preamble 502 in FIG. 32. Note that theexample of control information is described in the second exemplaryembodiment. Note that this point will be described additionally.

When the control information is transmitted in this way, it becomesunnecessary to incorporate dedicated control information for the datasymbol groups subjected to time division in first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202, and also it becomes unnecessary to incorporatededicated control information for data symbol groups subjected tofrequency division in first preamble 501 and second preamble 502, and itis possible to realize data transmission efficiency of controlinformation and simplification of control on control information of thereceiving apparatus.

Characteristic points in FIG. 32 are such that frequency division isperformed and there are two or more time sections in which there is aplurality of data symbol groups, and that temporal division is performedand there is a plurality of data symbols. Consequently, there is aneffect of enabling symbol groups of different data reception quality toexist at the same time, and of enabling a flexible setting of a datatransmission rate by appropriately defining data sections, and also ofenabling a flexible setting of a data transmission rate by performingtemporal division and appropriately defining data sections.

FIG. 33 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as in FIGS. 2, 30, 32 and 6 are assigned thesame reference numerals in FIG. 33 and will not be described. In FIG.33, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carriermethod such as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carrierson the vertical axis frequency.

FIG. 33 illustrates data symbol group #7 3201 and data symbol group #83202, and there are data symbol group #7 (3201) and data symbol group #8(3202) from time t4 to time t5. In this case, temporal division isperformed and there is a plurality of data symbol groups.

A difference between FIGS. 30 and 31 is that pilot symbol 601 isarranged before data symbol group #7 (3201). In this case, an advantagein a case of arranging pilot symbol 601 is as described in the firstexemplary embodiment.

Characteristic points in FIG. 33 are such that frequency division isperformed and there are two or more time sections in which there is aplurality of data symbol groups, and that temporal division is performedand there is a plurality of data symbols. Consequently, there is aneffect of enabling symbol groups of different data reception quality toexist at the same time, and of enabling a flexible setting of a datatransmission rate by appropriately defining data sections, and also ofenabling a flexible setting of a data transmission rate by performingtemporal division and appropriately defining data sections.

FIG. 34 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIG. 2 are assigned the same referencenumerals in FIG. 34 and will not be described. In FIG. 34, a verticalaxis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Then,since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDMmethod is used, there is a plurality of carriers on the vertical axisfrequency.

FIG. 34 illustrates data symbol group #1 3401, data symbol group #23402, data symbol group #3 3403, data symbol group #4 3404, data symbolgroup #5 3405, data symbol group #6 3406, data symbol group #7 3407, anddata symbol group #8 3408.

In FIG. 34, a data symbol group is arranged on a frame by using afrequency division method. Then, a difference of FIG. 34 from FIGS. 30to 33 is that there is flexibility in a setting of a time intervalbetween respective data symbol groups.

For example, data symbol group #1 has symbols arranged from time t1 totime t2, and has a long time interval as compared to other data symbols.Data symbol groups other than data symbol group #1 also each have a timeinterval flexibly set.

Characteristic points in FIG. 34 are such that frequency division isperformed, and that time intervals of data symbol groups are flexiblyset. Consequently, there is an effect of enabling symbol groups ofdifferent data reception quality to exist at the same time, and ofenabling a flexible setting of a data transmission rate by appropriatelydefining data sections.

FIG. 35 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIGS. 2 and 34 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 35 and will not be described. In FIG. 35, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier methodsuch as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on thevertical axis frequency.

FIG. 35 illustrates data symbol group #9 3509, data symbol group #103510, data symbol group #11 3511 and data symbol group #12 3512.Frequency division is performed, and data symbol group #9, data symbolgroup #10, data symbol group #11, data symbol group #12 and data symbolgroup #13 are transmitted between time t2 and time t3. As compared totime t1 and time t2, characteristic points are such that a time intervalof data symbol group #9, a time interval of data symbol group #10, and atime interval of data symbol group #11 are equal, and a time interval ofdata symbol group #12, and a time interval of data symbol group #13 areequal.

FIG. 35 illustrates data symbol group #14 3514 and data symbol group #153515. Temporal division is performed, and data symbol group #14 and datasymbol group #15 are transmitted between time t3 and time t4.

Consequently, there is an effect of enabling symbol groups of differentdata reception quality to exist at the same time, and of enabling aflexible setting of a data transmission rate by appropriately definingdata sections and frequency sections.

FIG. 36 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIGS. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 36 and will not be described. In FIG. 36, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier methodsuch as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on thevertical axis frequency.

A difference of FIG. 36 from FIG. 35 is that first preamble 501, secondpreamble 502, first preamble 3601 and second preamble 3602 are arranged.In this case, data symbol groups #1 to #8 and data symbol groups #9 to#13 are subjected to frequency division, and also data symbol groups #14and #15 are subjected to time division to be arranged.

Consequently, there is an effect of enabling symbol groups of differentdata reception quality to exist at the same time, and of enabling aflexible setting of a data transmission rate by appropriately definingdata sections and frequency sections.

In this case, control information related to data symbol groups #1 to #8subjected to frequency division, examples of which include a number ofcarriers and a time interval which are necessary for each data symbolgroup, a method for modulating each data symbol group, a method fortransmitting each data symbol group and a method of an error correctioncode to be used in each data symbol group, is transmitted with firstpreamble 201 and/or second preamble 202 in FIG. 36. Note that theexample of control information is described in the second exemplaryembodiment. Note that this point will be described additionally.

Then, control information related to data symbol groups #9 to #13subjected to frequency division, examples of which include a number ofcarriers and a time interval which are necessary for each data symbolgroup, a method for modulating each data symbol group, a method fortransmitting each data symbol group and a method of an error correctioncode to be used in each data symbol group, is transmitted with firstpreamble 501 and/or second preamble 502 in FIG. 36. Note that theexample of control information is described in the second exemplaryembodiment. Note that this point will be described additionally.

Moreover, control information related to data symbol groups #14 and #15subjected to temporal division, examples of which include a number ofsymbols (or a time interval) which is necessary for each data symbolgroup, a method for modulating each data symbol group, a method fortransmitting each data symbol group and a method of an error correctioncode to be used in each data symbol group, is transmitted with firstpreamble 3601 and/or second preamble 3602 in FIG. 36. Note that theexample of control information is described in the second exemplaryembodiment. Note that this point will be described additionally.

When the control information is transmitted in this way, it becomesunnecessary to incorporate dedicated control information for the datasymbol groups subjected to time division in first preamble 201, secondpreamble 202, first preamble 501 and second preamble 502, and also itbecomes unnecessary to incorporate dedicated control information fordata symbol groups subjected to frequency division in first preamble3601 and second preamble 3602, and it is possible to realize datatransmission efficiency of control information and simplification ofcontrol on control information of the receiving apparatus.

FIG. 37 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIGS. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 37 and will not be described. In FIG. 37, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier methodsuch as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on thevertical axis frequency.

A difference of FIG. 37 from FIGS. 35 and 36 is that pilot symbols 601and 3701 are arranged. In this case, data symbol groups #1 to #8 anddata symbol groups #9 to #13 are subjected to frequency division, andalso data symbol groups #14 and #15 are subjected to time division to bearranged.

Consequently, there is an effect of enabling symbol groups of differentdata reception quality to exist at the same time, and of enabling aflexible setting of a data transmission rate by appropriately definingdata sections and frequency sections. Moreover, an effect in a case ofinserting a pilot symbol is as described in the first exemplaryembodiment.

FIG. 38 is an example of a frame configuration in a modulated signal tobe transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. Elementsoperating in the same way as FIGS. 2, 6, 34 and 35 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 38 and will not be described. In FIG. 38, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Then, since a transmitting method using a multi-carrier methodsuch as an OFDM method is used, there is a plurality of carriers on thevertical axis frequency.

A difference of FIG. 38 from FIGS. 35, 36 and 37 is that the “firstpreamble and the second preamble” or “pilot symbols” 3801 and 3802 arearranged. In this case, data symbol groups #1 to #8 and data symbolgroups #9 to #13 are subjected to frequency division, and also datasymbol groups #14 and #15 are subjected to time division to be arranged.

Consequently, there is an effect of enabling symbol groups of differentdata reception quality to exist at the same time, and of enabling aflexible setting of a data transmission rate by appropriately definingdata sections and frequency sections.

Then, as illustrated in FIG. 38, the “first preamble and the secondpreamble” or “pilot symbols” 3801 and 3802 are inserted and, dependingon a situation, the “first preamble and the second preamble” or the“pilot symbols” are switched and used. The above-described switching maybe performed based on, for example, the transmitting method.

FIGS. 30 to 38 illustrate the examples where a data symbol groupsubjected to time division is arranged after a data symbol groupsubjected to frequency division. However, the arrangement is not limitedto this arrangement. The data symbol group subjected to frequencydivision may be arranged after the data symbol group subjected to timedivision. In this case, in the example in FIGS. 32 and 36, the firstpreamble and the second preamble are inserted between the data symbolgroup subjected to time division and the data symbol group subjected tofrequency division. However, symbols other than the first preamble andthe second preamble may be inserted. Moreover, in the example in FIGS.33 and 37, the pilot symbol is inserted between the data symbol groupsubjected to time division and the data symbol group subjected tofrequency division. However, symbols other than the pilot symbol may beinserted.

In the present exemplary embodiment, the examples of the frameconfiguration of the modulated signal to be transmitted by thetransmitting apparatus are described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 38.With reference to these figures, the above describes the point that“time division (temporal division) is performed.” However, when two datasymbol groups are connected, there is a portion subjected to frequencydivision at a seam portion. This point will be described with referenceto FIG. 39.

FIG. 39 illustrates symbol 3901 of data symbol group #1 and symbol 3902of data symbol group #2. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 39, thesymbol of data symbol group #1 ends with carrier 4. In this case, thesymbol of data symbol group #2 is arranged from carrier 5 at time to.Then, only a portion at time t0 is exceptionally subjected to frequencydivision. However, there is only the symbol of data symbol group #1before time t0, and there is only the symbol of data symbol group #2after time t0. At this point, time division (temporal division) isperformed.

FIG. 40 illustrates another example. Note that the same referencenumerals as those in FIG. 39 are assigned. As illustrated at time t0 inFIG. 40, the symbol of data symbol group #1 ends with carrier 4. Then,as illustrated at time t1, the symbol of data symbol group #1 ends withcarrier 5. Then, the symbol of data symbol group #2 is arranged fromcarrier 5 at time t0, and the symbol of data symbol group #2 is arrangedfrom carrier 6 at time t1. Then, portions at time t0 and time t1 areexceptionally subjected to frequency division. However, there is onlythe symbol of data symbol group #1 before time t0, and there is only thesymbol of data symbol #2 after time t1. At this point, time division(temporal division) is performed.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, there is a case where, except for theexceptional portions, there are time at which there is no data symbolother than the symbol of data symbol group #1, but there may be a pilotsymbol or the like, and time at which there is no data symbol other thanthe symbol of data symbol group #2, but there may be a pilot symbol orthe like. This case will be referred to as “time division (temporaldivision) is performed.” Hence, an exceptional time existing method isnot limited to FIGS. 39 and 40.

Moreover, the “time division (temporal division) is performed” is notlimited to the present exemplary embodiment, and the same interpretationalso applies to the other exemplary embodiments.

As described in the first exemplary embodiment, the transmittingapparatus in FIG. 1 may select any frame configuration of the frameconfigurations described in the first exemplary embodiment to the thirdexemplary embodiment and the frame configuration described in thepresent exemplary embodiment, and may transmit a modulated signal. Anexample of the method for configuring control information of informationrelated to a frame configuration is as described in the first exemplaryembodiment.

Then, the receiving apparatus (for example, FIG. 23) which receives themodulated signal transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1receives the control information described in the first exemplaryembodiment, the second exemplary embodiment and the like, demodulatesand decodes a data symbol group based on this control information andobtains information. As a result, the information described herein istransmitted as control information, and thus it is possible to obtain aneffect of enabling improvement in data reception quality and improvementin data transmission efficiency and of enabling an accurate operation ofthe receiving apparatus.

The method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #6 in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 32 may be set with first preamble 201 and/orsecond preamble 202. The method for transmitting data symbol groups #7and #8 may be set with first preamble 501 and/or second preamble 502.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 to #6 is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #6 isof SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, and eithera case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a next “set of the first preamble and the second preamble” is ofeither “MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission(SIMO transmission),” and in the method for transmitting a plurality ofdata symbol groups present between the “set of the first preamble andthe second preamble” and the next “set of the first preamble and thesecond preamble,” there is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission) and there is no mix of MISOtransmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, a fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Note that pilot symbol 4102 ishighly likely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Similarly, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #8 inthe frame configuration in FIG. 36 may be set with first preamble 201and/or second preamble 202. The method for transmitting data symbolgroups #9 to #13 may be set with first preamble 501 and/or secondpreamble 502. The method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15may be set with first preamble 3601 and/or second preamble 3602.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 to #8 is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #8 isof SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable., and eithera case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13 is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, and either a casewhere the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is ofMIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the “method fortransmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is of SISO transmission(SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a next “set of the first preamble and the second preamble” is ofeither “MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission(SIMO transmission),” and in the method for transmitting a plurality ofdata symbol groups present between the “set of the first preamble andthe second preamble” and the next “set of the first preamble and thesecond preamble,” there is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission) and there is no mix of MISOtransmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Note that pilot symbol 4102 ishighly likely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Moreover, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #8 in theframe configuration in FIG. 33 may be set with first preamble 201 and/orsecond preamble 202.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 to #6 is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #6 isof SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, and eithera case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol groups #7 and #8 is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a “pilot symbol” is of either “MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. There is nomix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission) andthere is no mix of MISO transmission SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of datasymbol groups present between the “pilot symbol” and a next “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” is of either “MIMO transmissionor MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thereis no mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). However, FIG. 33 does not illustrate the “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” next to the pilot symbol.

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is highlylikely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Similarly, the method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #15 inthe frame configuration in FIG. 37 may be set with first preamble 201and/or second preamble 202.

In this case, either a case where the “method for transmitting datasymbol groups #1 to #8 is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” ora case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #1 to #8 isof SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, and eithera case where the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13is of MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the“method for transmitting data symbol groups #9 to #13 is of SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission)” may be selectable, and either a casewhere the “method for transmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is ofMIMO transmission or MISO transmission” or a case where the “method fortransmitting data symbol groups #14 and #15 is of SISO transmission(SIMO transmission)” may be selectable.

That is, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “set of the first preamble and the second preamble”and a “pilot symbol” is of either “MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. There is nomix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission) andthere is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). Then, a method for transmitting a plurality of datasymbol groups present between the “pilot symbol” and a next “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” is of either “MIMO transmissionor MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)”. Thereis no mix of MIMO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission)and there is no mix of MISO transmission and SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission). However, FIG. 37 does not illustrate the “set of thefirst preamble and the second preamble” next to the pilot symbol.

Moreover, a method for transmitting a plurality of data symbol groupspresent between a “pilot symbol” and a “pilot symbol” is of either “MIMOtransmission or MISO transmission” or “SISO transmission (SIMOtransmission)”. There is no mix of MIMO transmission and SISOtransmission (SIMO transmission) and there is no mix of MISOtransmission and SISO transmission (SIMO transmission).

When there is a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO(MISO) transmitting method, fluctuation of received field intensityincreases in the receiving apparatus. For this reason, there is aproblem of a quantization error that is likely to occur during AD(Analog-to-Digital) conversion, and consequently of deterioration indata reception quality. However, the above-described way increases apossibility that an effect of suppression of occurrence of such aphenomenon and improvement in data reception quality can be obtained.

However, the present disclosure is not limited to the above.

Moreover, in association with the above-described switching of thetransmitting methods, methods for inserting a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group are also switched, and there is also anadvantage from a viewpoint of improvement in data transmissionefficiency. This is because there is no mix of the SISO (SIMO)transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO) transmitting method. When thereis a mix of the SISO (SIMO) transmitting method and the MIMO (MISO)transmitting method, there is a possibility that frequency of insertinga pilot symbol becomes excessive and that the data transmissionefficiency decreases. Note that a configuration of a pilot symbol to beinserted to a data symbol group is as follows.

A “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol group during SISOtransmission” and a “pilot symbol to be inserted to a data symbol groupduring MIMO transmission or MISO transmission” are different in a pilotsymbol configuring method. This point will be described with referenceto the figures. FIG. 41 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilotsymbol to be inserted to the data symbol group during SISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 41, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. FIG. 41 illustrates symbol4101 of data symbol group #1, and pilot symbol 4102. In this case, datais transmitted with symbol 4101 of data symbol group #1. Pilot symbol4102 is a symbol for performing frequency offset estimation, frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, signal detection and channelestimation (radio wave propagation environment estimation) in thereceiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is configured with, for example,a PSK (Phase Shift Keying) symbol which is known in the transmittingapparatus and the receiving apparatus. Pilot symbol 4102 is highlylikely to need to be a PSK symbol.

FIG. 42 illustrates an insertion example of the “pilot symbol to beinserted to the data symbol group during MIMO transmission or MISOtransmission.” Note that in FIG. 42, a horizontal axis indicates time,and a vertical axis indicates a frequency. “During MIMO transmission orMISO transmission,” modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas,respectively. Here, the modulated signals are referred to as modulatedsignal #1 and modulated signal #2. FIG. 42 illustrates an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #1 and an insertionexample of a pilot symbol of modulated signal #2 in combination.

Example 1

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 are PSK symbols.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Both of first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 are PSK symbols.

Then, “first pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilotsymbol 4202 for modulated signal #1” and “first pilot symbol 4201 formodulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal#2” are orthogonal (a correlation is zero) at a certain cycle.

Example 2

Case of Modulated Signal #1:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #1 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #1 is a PSK symbol. Secondpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,second pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #1 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Case of Modulated Signal #2:

First pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 and second pilot symbol4202 for modulated signal #2 are inserted as illustrated in FIG. 42.Second pilot symbol 4201 for modulated signal #2 is a PSK symbol. Firstpilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 is a null symbol (in-phasecomponent I is 0 (zero) and quadrature component Q is 0 (zero)). Hence,first pilot symbol 4202 for modulated signal #2 may not be referred toas a pilot symbol.

Fifth Exemplary Embodiment

The frame of a modulated signal to be transmitted by the transmittingapparatus in FIG. 1 is described in the fourth exemplary embodiment withreference to FIGS. 30 to 38. In each of FIGS. 30 to 38, the frame isconfigured in a case where a data symbol group is subjected to frequencydivision and in a case where a data symbol group is subjected to timedivision (temporal division). In this case, it is necessary toaccurately transmit frequency resources (carriers) and time resources tobe used by each data symbol group to a receiving apparatus.

In the present exemplary embodiment, an example of a method forconfiguring control information related to a frequency (frequencyresources) and time (time resources) to be used by each data symbolgroup in a case of the frame configurations in FIGS. 30 to 38 will bedescribed. Note that the frame configurations in FIGS. 30 to 38 are onlyexamples, and detailed requirements of frame configurations are asdescribed in the fourth exemplary embodiment.

<Case where Frequency Division is Performed>

An example of a method for generating control information related tofrequency resources and time resources to be used by each data symbolgroup in a case where frequency division is performed will be described.

FIG. 43 illustrates an example in a case where a data symbol group issubjected to frequency division in a frame of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. In FIG. 43, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Note that as with the first exemplary embodiment to the fourthexemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may be of symbols of anymethod of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and an MISOmethod.

FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1. Data symbolgroup #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 5 and byusing time 1 to time 16. However, a first index of a carrier is assumedto be “carrier 1” but is not limited to “carrier 1,” and also a firstindex of time is assumed to be “time 1” but is not limited to “time 1”.

FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2. Data symbolgroup #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carrier 6 to carrier 9 and byusing time 1 to time 5.

FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3. Data symbolgroup #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carrier 10 to carrier 14 and byusing time 1 to time 16.

FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4. Data symbolgroup #4 (4304) is transmitted by using carrier 6 to carrier 9 and byusing time 6 to time 12.

FIG. 43 illustrates symbol 4305 of data symbol group #5. Data symbolgroup #5 (4305) is transmitted by using carrier 6 to carrier 9 and byusing time 13 to time 16.

First Example

An example of control information related to a frequency and time to beused by each data symbol group in this case will be described.

Control information related to a default position of a carrier to beused by data symbol group #j is m(j, 0), m(j, 1), m(j, 2) and m(j, 3),

control information related to a number of carriers to be used by datasymbol group #j is n(j, 0), n(j, 1), n(j, 2) and n(j, 3),

control information related to a default position of time to be used bydata symbol group #j is o(j, 0), o(j, 1), o(j, 2) and o(j, 3), and

control information related to a number of pieces of time to be used bydata symbol group #j is p(j, 0), p(j, 1), p(j, 2) and p(j, 3).

In this case, when a default position of a carrier to be used by datasymbol group #(j=K) is “carrier 1,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K,0)=0, m(K, 1)=0, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K,1), m(K, 2) and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 2,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 3,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j K) is “carrier 4,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 5,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 6,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 7,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 8,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=0, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 9,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 10,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 11,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 12,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=0 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 13,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 14,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=0, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 15,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 16,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1, m(K,1)=1, m(K, 2)=1 and m(K, 3)=1, and transmits m(K, 0), m(K, 1), m(K, 2)and m(K, 3).

When a number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of 1carrier, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K, 2)=0and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of2 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of3 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of4 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=0 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of5 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of6 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of7 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of8 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=0, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of9 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is,of 10 carriers the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0,n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) andn(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is,of 11 carriers the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1,n(K, 2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) andn(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of12 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=0 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of13 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of14 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=0, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of15 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of16 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1, n(K, 1)=1, n(K,2)=1 and n(K, 3)=1, and transmits n(K, 0), n(K, 1), n(K, 2) and n(K, 3).

When a default position of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is “time 1,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K, 1)=0, o(K,2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 2,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 3,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 4,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 5,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 6,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 7,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 8,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=0, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 9,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 10,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2) ando(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 11,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 12,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=0 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 13,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 14,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=0, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 15,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 16,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1, o(K,1)=1, o(K, 2)=1 and o(K, 3)=1, and transmits o(K, 0), o(K, 1), o(K, 2)and o(K, 3).

When a number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 1, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 2, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 3, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 4, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 5, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 6, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 7, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 8, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=0, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 9, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 10, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 11, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 12, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=0and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 13, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 14, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=0, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 15, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 16, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1, p(K, 1)=1, p(K, 2)=1and p(K, 3)=1, and transmits p(K, 0), p(K, 1), p(K, 2) and p(K, 3).

Next, data symbol group #3 will be described as an example.

Data symbol group #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carrier 10 tocarrier 14 and by using time 1 to time 16.

As a result, a default position of a carrier is carrier 10. Hence, thetransmitting apparatus sets m(3, 0)=1, m(3, 1)=0, m(3, 2)=0 and m(3,3)=1, and transmits m(3, 0), m(3, 1), m(3, 2) and m(3, 3).

Moreover, a number of carriers to be used is 5. Hence, the transmittingapparatus sets n(3, 0)=0, n(3, 1)=0, n(3, 2)=1 and n(3, 3)=0, andtransmits n(3, 0), n(3, 1), n(3, 2) and n(3, 3).

A default position of time is time 1. Hence, the transmitting apparatussets o(3, 0)=0, o(3, 1)=0, o(3, 2)=0 and o(3, 3)=0, and transmits o(3,0), o(3, 1), o(3, 2) and o(3, 3).

Moreover, a number of pieces of time to be used is 16. Hence, thetransmitting apparatus sets p(3, 0)=1, p(3, 1)=1, p(3, 2)=1 and p(3,3)=1, and transmits p(3, 0), p(3, 1), p(3, 2) and p(3, 3).

Second Example

FIG. 44 illustrates an example in a case where a data symbol group issubjected to frequency division in a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal to be transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1.Elements common to those in FIG. 43 are assigned the same referencenumerals in FIG. 44. Moreover, in FIG. 44, a vertical axis indicates afrequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Note that as with thefirst exemplary embodiment to the fourth exemplary embodiment, a datasymbol group may be of symbols of any method of an SISO method (SIMOmethod), an MIMO method and an MISO method.

A difference of FIG. 44 from FIG. 43 is that each data symbol group has,for example, a number of carriers of 4×A (A is an integer equal to ormore than 1), that is, the number of carriers to be used by each datasymbol group being a multiple of 4 (but, except 0 (zero)), and has anumber of pieces of time of 4×B (B is a natural number equal to or morethan 1), that is, the number of pieces of time to be used by each datasymbol group being a multiple of 4 (but, except 0 (zero)). However, thenumber of carriers to be used by each data symbol group is not limitedto a multiple of 4, and may be a multiple of C (C is an integer equal toor more than 2) except 0 (zero). Moreover, the number of pieces of timeto be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4,and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or more than 2)except 0 (zero).

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1. Data symbolgroup #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 8, that is,by using 8 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 1 to time 16(the number of pieces of time is 16, a multiple of 4). However, a firstindex of a carrier is assumed to be “carrier 1” but is not limited to“carrier 1,” and also a first index of time is assumed to be “time 1”but is not limited to “time 1”.

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2. Data symbolgroup #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carrier 9 to carrier 12, thatis, by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 1 to time 4(the number of pieces of time is 4, a multiple of 4).

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3. Data symbolgroup #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carrier 13 to carrier 16, thatis, by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 1 to time 16(the number of pieces of time is 16, a multiple of 4).

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4. Data symbolgroup #4 (4304) is transmitted by using carrier 9 to carrier 12, thatis, by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 5 to time 12(the number of pieces of time is 8, a multiple of 4).

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4305 of data symbol group #5. Data symbolgroup #5 (4305) is transmitted by using carrier 9 to carrier 12, thatis, by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 13 to time16 (the number of pieces of time is 4, a multiple of 4).

When each data symbol group is allocated to a frame according to suchrules, it is possible to reduce

a number of bits of the above-described “control information related tothe default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group #j,”

a number of bits of the above-described “control information related tothe number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #j,”

a number of bits of the above-described “control information related tothe default position of the time to be used by data symbol group #j,”and

a number of bits of the above-described “control information related tothe number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #j,” and itis possible to improve data (information) transmission efficiency.

In this case, it is possible to define the control information asfollows.

The control information related to the default position of the carrierto be used by data symbol group #j is m(j, 0) and m(j, 1),

the control information related to the number of carriers to be used bydata symbol group #j is n(j, 0) and n(j, 1),

the control information related to the default position of the time tobe used by data symbol group #j is o(j, 0) and o(j, 1), and

the control information related to the number of pieces of time to beused by data symbol group #j is pa, 0) and p(j, 1).

In this case, when a default position of a carrier to be used by datasymbol group #(j=K) is “carrier 1,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K,0)=0 and m(K, 1)=0, and transmits m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 5,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1 andm(K, 1)=0, and transmits m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 9,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=0 andm(K, 1)=1, and transmits m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

When the default position of the carrier to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “carrier 13,” the transmitting apparatus sets m(K, 0)=1 andm(K, 1)=1, and transmits m(K, 0) and m(K, 1).

When a number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of 4carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0 and n(K, 1)=0, andtransmits n(K, 0) and n(K, 1).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of8 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1 and n(K, 1)=0, andtransmits n(K, 0) and n(K, 1).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of12 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=0 and n(K, 1)=1,and transmits n(K, 0) and n(K, 1).

When the number of carriers to be used by data symbol group #(j=K) is of16 carriers, the transmitting apparatus sets n(K, 0)=1 and n(K, 1)=1,and transmits n(K, 0) and n(K, 1).

When a default position of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is “time 1,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0 and o(K, 1)=0,and transmits o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 5,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1 and o(K,1)=0, and transmits o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 9,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=0 and o(K,1)=1, and transmits o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

When the default position of the time to be used by data symbol group#(j=K) is “time 13,” the transmitting apparatus sets o(K, 0)=1 and o(K,1)=1, and transmits o(K, 0) and o(K, 1).

When a number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 4, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0 and p(K, 1)=0, andtransmits p(K, 0) and p(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #0=K)is 8, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1 and p(K, 1)=0, andtransmits p(K, 0) and p(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 12, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=0 and p(K, 1)=1, andtransmits p(K, 0) and p(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 16, the transmitting apparatus sets p(K, 0)=1 and p(K, 1)=1, andtransmits p(K, 0) and p(K, 1).

Next, data symbol group #4 will be described as an example.

FIG. 44 illustrates symbol 4304 of data symbol group #4, and data symbolgroup #4 (4304) is transmitted by using carrier 9 to carrier 12, thatis, by using 4 (a multiple of 4) carriers and by using time 5 to time 12(the number of pieces of time is 8, a multiple of 4).

As a result, a default position of a carrier is carrier 9. Hence, thetransmitting apparatus sets m(3, 0)=0 and m(3, 1)=1, and transmits m(3,0) and m(3, 1).

Moreover, a number of carriers to be used is 4. Hence, the transmittingapparatus sets n(3, 0)=0 and n(3, 1)=0, and transmits n(3, 0) and n(3,1).

A default position of time is time 5. Hence, the transmitting apparatussets o(3, 0)=1 and o(3, 1)=0, and transmits o(3, 0) and o(3, 1).

Moreover, a number of pieces of time to be used is 8. Hence, thetransmitting apparatus sets p(3, 0)=1 and p(3, 1)=0, and transmits p(3,0) and p(3, 1).

Third Example

A control information transmitting method which is different from thecontrol information transmitting method of the second example when aframe configuration of a modulated signal to be transmitted by thetransmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is a configuration in FIG. 44 will bedescribed.

In FIG. 44, each data symbol group has, for example, a number ofcarriers of 4×A (A is an integer equal to or more than 1), that is, thenumber of carriers to be used by each data symbol group being a multipleof 4 (but, except 0 (zero)), and has a number of pieces of time of 4×B(B is a natural number equal to or more than 1), that is, the number ofpieces of time to be used by each data symbol group being a multiple of4 (but, except 0 (zero)). However, the number of carriers to be used byeach data symbol group is not limited to a multiple of 4, and may be amultiple of C (C is an integer equal to or more than 2) except 0 (zero).Moreover, the number of pieces of time to be used by each data symbolgroup is not limited to a multiple of 4, and may be a multiple of D (Dis an integer equal to or more than 2) except 0 (zero).

Hence, area decomposition is performed as illustrated in FIG. 45. InFIG. 45, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. Then, there are carrier 1 to carrier 16, and there aretime 1 to time 16 in accordance with FIG. 44. Note that in FIG. 45, eacharea is configured with an area of 4×4=16 symbols of 4 carriers in acarrier direction and 4 pieces of time in time direction. In a case ofgeneralization using C and D as described above, each area is configuredwith an area of C×D symbols of C carriers in the carrier direction and Dpieces of time in the time direction.

In FIG. 45, area 4400 configured with carrier 1 to carrier 4 and time 1to time 4 is referred to as area #0.

Area 4401 configured with carrier 5 to carrier 8 and time 1 to time 4 isreferred to as area #1.

Area 4402 configured with carrier 9 to carrier 12 and time 1 to time 4is referred to as area #2.

Area 4403 configured with carrier 13 to carrier 16 and time 1 to time 4is referred to as area #3.

Area 4404 configured with carrier 1 to carrier 4 and time 5 to time 8 isreferred to as area #4.

Area 4405 configured with carrier 5 to carrier 8 and time 5 to time 8 isreferred to as area #5.

Area 4406 configured with carrier 9 to carrier 12 and time 5 to time 8is referred to as area #6.

Area 4407 configured with carrier 13 to carrier 16 and time 5 to time 8is referred to as area #7.

Area 4408 configured with carrier 1 to carrier 4 and time 9 to time 12is referred to as area #8.

Area 4409 configured with carrier 5 to carrier 8 and time 9 to time 12is referred to as area #9.

Area 4410 configured with carrier 9 to carrier 12 and time 9 to time 12is referred to as area #10.

Area 4411 configured with carrier 13 to carrier 16 and time 9 to time 12is referred to as area #11.

Area 4412 configured with carrier 1 to carrier 4 and time 13 to time 16is referred to as area #12.

Area 4413 configured with carrier 5 to carrier 8 and time 13 to time 16is referred to as area #13.

Area 4414 configured with carrier 9 to carrier 12 and time 13 to time 16is referred to as area #14.

Area 4415 configured with carrier 13 to carrier 16 and time 13 to time16 is referred to as area #15.

In this case, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits controlinformation as in an example described below, in order to transmitinformation of frequency and time resources being used by each datasymbol group to the receiving apparatus.

When data symbol group #1 in FIG. 44 is subjected to the areadecomposition as illustrated in FIG. 45, data (information) istransmitted by using area #0 (4400), area #1 (4401), area #4 (4404),area #5 (4405), area #8 (4408), area #9 (4409), area #12 (4412) and area#13 (4413). Hence, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits asdata symbol group #1 the control information indicating that

“area #0 (4400), area #1 (4401), area #4 (4404), area #5 (4405), area #8(4408), area #9 (4409), area #12 (4412) and area #13 (4413) are used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the areas(area #0 (4400), area #1 (4401), area #4 (4404), area #5 (4405), area #8(4408), area #9 (4409), area #12 (4412) and area #13 (4413)).

Similarly, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbolgroup #2 in FIG. 44 the control information indicating that

“area #2 (4402) is used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the area(area #2 (4402)).

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbol group #3in FIG. 44 the control information indicating that

“area #3 (4403), area #7 (4407), area #11 (4411) and area #15 (4415) areused.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the areas(area #3 (4403), area #7 (4407), area #11 (4411) and area #15 (4415)).

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbol group #4in FIG. 44 the control information indicating that

“area #6 (4406) and area #10 (4410) are used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the areas(area #6 (4406) and area #10 (4410)).

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbol group #5in

FIG. 44 the control information indicating that

“area #14 (4414) is used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the area(area #14 (4414)).

As described above, in <second example> and <third example> there is anadvantage that it is possible to transmit a small number of bits ofinformation of time and frequency resources being used.

Meanwhile, in <first example> there is an advantage that it is possibleto more flexibly allocate time and frequency resources to a data symbolgroup.

<Case where Time (Temporal) Division is Performed>

An example of generation of control information related to frequencyresources and time resources to be used by each data symbol group in acase where time (temporal) division is performed will be described.

Fourth Example

Even in a case where time (temporal) division is performed, controlinformation is transmitted in the same way as a case where frequencydivision is performed. Hence, the above-described <first example> iscarried out.

Fifth Example

Even in a case where time (temporal) division is performed, controlinformation is transmitted in the same way as a case where frequencydivision is performed. Hence, the above-described <second example> iscarried out.

Sixth Example

Even in a case where time (temporal) division is performed, controlinformation is transmitted in the same way as a case where frequencydivision is performed. Hence, the above-described <third example> iscarried out.

Seventh Example

e(X, Y) described in the second exemplary embodiment is transmitted ascontrol information. That is, information related to a number of symbolsin a frame of data symbol group #j is e(j, 0) and e(j, 1).

In this case, for example,

when a number of symbols in a frame of data symbol group #(j=K) is of256 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=0 andtransmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 512 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=0and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 1024 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=0 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

When the number of symbols in the frame of data symbol group #(j=K) isof 2048 symbols, the transmitting apparatus sets e(K, 0)=1 and e(K, 1)=1and transmits e(K, 0) and e(K, 1).

Note that the setting of the number of symbols is not limited to thefour settings, and the transmitting apparatus only needs to be able toset one or more types of the number of symbols.

Eighth Example

The transmitting apparatus transmits information of a number of piecesof time to be necessary for each data symbol, to the receivingapparatus, and the receiving apparatus obtains this information and thuscan learn frequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol.

For example, information related to a number of pieces of time to beused in a frame of data symbol group #j is q(j, 0), q(j, 1), q(j, 2) andq(j, 3).

When a number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 1, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #Q=K)is 2, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #0=K)is 3, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 4, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 5, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 6, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 7, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 8, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=0, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 9, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 10, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 11, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 12, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=0and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 13, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 14, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=0, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 15, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 16, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1, q(K, 1)=1, q(K, 2)=1and q(K, 3)=1, and transmits q(K, 0), q(K, 1), q(K, 2) and q(K, 3).

FIG. 46 illustrates an example where a data symbol group is subjected totime (temporal) division in a frame of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1. In FIG. 46, avertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicatestime. Note that as with the first exemplary embodiment to the fourthexemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may be of symbols of anymethod of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and an MISOmethod.

In FIG. 46, symbol 4301 is of data symbol group #1, and data symbolgroup #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16 and byusing time 1 to time 4. Thus, all carriers which can be allocated asdata symbols are used. Note that when there are carriers for arranging apilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, suchcarriers are excluded. However, a first index of a carrier is assumed tobe “carrier 1” but is not limited to “carrier 1,” and also a first indexof time is assumed to be “time 1” but is not limited to “time 1”.

FIG. 46 illustrates symbol 4302, of data symbol group #2, and datasymbol group #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16and by using time 5 to time 12. Thus, all carriers which can beallocated as data symbols are used. Note that when there are carriersfor arranging a pilot symbol and carriers for transmitting controlinformation, such carriers are excluded.

FIG. 46 illustrates symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3, and data symbolgroup #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16 and byusing time 13 to time 16. Thus, all carriers which can be allocated asdata symbols are used. Note that when there are carriers for arranging apilot symbol and carriers for transmitting control information, suchcarriers are excluded.

For example, data symbol group #2 is transmitted by using time 5 to time12, that is, a number of pieces of time is 8. Hence, the transmittingapparatus sets q(2, 0)=1, q(2, 1)=1, q(2, 2)=1, and q(2, 3)=0, andtransmits q(2, 0), q(2, 1), q(2, 2) and q(2, 3).

Control information may also be generated for data symbol group #1 anddata symbol #3 in the same way, and the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1transmits q(1, 0), q(1, 1), q(1, 2) and q(1, 3), and q(2, 0), q(2, 1),q(2, 2) and q(2, 3), and q(3, 0), q(3, 1), q(3, 2) and q(3, 3).

The receiving apparatus in FIG. 23 receives q(1, 0), q(1, 1), q(1, 2)and q(1, 3), and q(2, 0), q(2, 1), q(2, 2) and q(2, 3), and q(3, 0),q(3, 1), q(3, 2) and q(3, 3), and learns frequency and time resourcesbeing used by data symbol groups. In this case, when it is assumed thatthe transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus sharearrangement, for example, such that “data symbol group #1 is temporarilyarranged first, and subsequently, data symbol group #2, data symbolgroup #3, data symbol group #4, data symbol group #5, . . . ” arearranged, the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus canlearn frequency and time resources being used by each data symbol groupfrom learning a number of pieces of time to be used by each data symbolgroup. It becomes unnecessary for the transmitting apparatus to transmitinformation of the first time at which each data symbol group isarranged. Consequently, data transmission efficiency improves.

Ninth Example

Unlike <eighth example>, each data symbol group has, for example, anumber of pieces of time of 4×B (B is a natural number equal to or morethan 1), that is, the number of pieces of time to be used by each datasymbol group being a multiple of 4 (but, except 0 (zero)). However, thenumber of pieces of time to be used by each data symbol group is notlimited to a multiple of 4, and may be a multiple of D (D is an integerequal to or more than 2) except 0 (zero).

FIG. 46 illustrates symbol 4301 of data symbol group #1, and data symbolgroup #1 (4301) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16 and byusing time 1 to time 4 (the number of pieces of time is 4, a multiple of4). Thus, all carriers which can be allocated as data symbols are used.Note that when there are carriers for arranging a pilot symbol andcarriers for transmitting control information, such carriers areexcluded. However, a first index of a carrier is assumed to be “carrier1” but is not limited to “carrier 1,” and also a first index of time isassumed to be “time 1” but is not limited to “time 1”.

FIG. 46 illustrates symbol 4302 of data symbol group #2, and data symbolgroup #2 (4302) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16 and byusing time 5 to time 12 (the number of pieces of time is 8, a multipleof 4). Thus, all carriers which can be allocated as data symbols areused. Note that when there are carriers for arranging a pilot symbol andcarriers for transmitting control information, such carriers areexcluded.

FIG. 46 illustrates symbol 4303 of data symbol group #3, and data symbolgroup #3 (4303) is transmitted by using carrier 1 to carrier 16 and byusing time 13 to time 16 (the number of pieces of time is 8, a multipleof 4). Thus, all carriers which can be allocated as data symbols areused. Note that when there are carriers for arranging a pilot symbol andcarriers for transmitting control information, such carriers areexcluded.

When each data symbol group is allocated to a frame according to suchrules, it is possible to reduce

a number of bits of the above-described “information related to thenumber of pieces of time to be used in the frame of data symbol group#j,” and it is possible to improve data (information) transmissionefficiency.

In this case, it is possible to define the control information asfollows.

The information related to the number of pieces of time to be used inthe frame of data symbol group #j is q(j, 0) and q(j, 1).

When a number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 4, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0 and q(K, 1)=0, andtransmits q(K, 0) and q(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 8, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1 and q(K, 1)=0, andtransmits q(K, 0) and q(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 12, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=0 and q(K, 1)=1, andtransmits q(K, 0) and q(K, 1).

When the number of pieces of time to be used by data symbol group #(j=K)is 16, the transmitting apparatus sets q(K, 0)=1 and q(K, 1)=1, andtransmits q(K, 0) and q(K, 1).

For example, data symbol group #2 in FIG. 46 is transmitted by usingtime 5 to time 12, that is, the number of pieces of time is 8. Hence,the transmitting apparatus sets q(2, 0)=1 and q(2, 1)=0, and transmitsq(2, 0) and q(2, 1).

Control information may also be generated for data symbol group #1 anddata symbol #3 in the same way, and the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1transmits q(1, 0) and q(1, 1), and q(2, 0) and q(2, 1), and q(3, 0) andq(3, 1).

The receiving apparatus in FIG. 23 receives q(1, 0) and q(1, 1), andq(2, 0) and q(2, 1), and q(3, 0) and q(3, 1), and learns frequency andtime resources being used by data symbol groups. In this case, when itis assumed that the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatusshare arrangement, for example, such that “data symbol group #1 istemporarily arranged first, and subsequently, data symbol group #2, datasymbol group #3, data symbol group #4, data symbol group #5, . . . ” arearranged, the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus canlearn frequency and time resources being used by each data symbol groupfrom learning the number of pieces of time to be used by each datasymbol group. It becomes unnecessary for the transmitting apparatus totransmit information of the first time at which each data symbol groupis arranged. Consequently, data transmission efficiency improves.

Tenth Example

Unlike <eighth example>, each data symbol group has, for example, anumber of pieces of time of 4×B (B is a natural number equal to or morethan 1), that is, the number of pieces of time to be used by each datasymbol group being a multiple of 4 (but, except 0 (zero)). Thus, thesame as in <ninth example> applies. However, the number of pieces oftime to be used by each data symbol group is not limited to a multipleof 4, and may be a multiple of D (D is an integer equal to or more than2) except 0 (zero).

Hence, area decomposition is performed as illustrated in FIG. 47. InFIG. 47, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. Then, there are carrier 1 to carrier 16, and there aretime 1 to time 16 in accordance with FIG. 46. Note that in FIG. 47, eacharea is configured with an area of 16×4=64 symbols of 16 carriers in acarrier direction, and 4 pieces of time in a time direction. In a caseof generalization using C and D as described above, each area isconfigured with an area of C×D symbols of C carriers in the carrierdirection and D pieces of time in the time direction.

In FIG. 47, area 4700 configured with time 1 to time 4 is referred to asarea #0.

Area 4701 configured with time 5 to time 8 is referred to as area #1.

Area 4702 configured with time 9 to time 12 is referred to as area #2.

Area 4703 configured with time 13 to time 16 is referred to as area #3.

In this case, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits controlinformation as in an example described below, in order to transmitinformation of frequency and time resources being used by each datasymbol group to the receiving apparatus.

When data symbol group #1 in FIG. 46 is subjected to the areadecomposition as in FIG. 47, data (information) is transmitted by usingarea #0 (4700). Hence, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits asdata symbol group #1 the control information indicating that

“area #0 (4700) is used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the area(area #0 (4700)).

Similarly, the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbolgroup #2 in FIG. 46 the control information indicating that

“area #1 (4701) and area #2 (4702) are used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the areas(area #1 (4701) and area #2 (4702)).

The transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 transmits as data symbol group #3in FIG. 46 the control information indicating that

“area #3 (4703) is used.”

In this case, the control information includes information of the area(area #3 (4703)).

The control information during time (temporal) division is described in<fourth example> to <tenth example>. For example, when <fourth example>,<fifth example> and <sixth example> are used, the control information offrequency division and the control information during time (temporal)division can be configured in the same way.

Meanwhile, in a case of <seventh example> to <tenth example>, thetransmitting apparatus transmits “control information related to use oftime and frequency resources during frequency division, and controlinformation related to use of time and frequency resources during time(temporal) division” having different configurations, by using the firstpreamble and/or the second preamble.

Note that for example, in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 5,first preamble 201 and/or second preamble 202 include controlinformation related to use of time and frequency resources duringfrequency division, and a configuration may be made such that firstpreamble 501 and/or second preamble 502 include control informationrelated to use of time and frequency resources during time (temporal)division.

Similarly, in a case of the frame configuration in FIGS. 25, 28 and 32,first preamble 201 and/or second preamble 202 include controlinformation related to use of time and frequency resources duringfrequency division, and a configuration may be made such that firstpreamble 501 and/or second preamble 502 include control informationrelated to use of time and frequency resources during time (temporal)division.

Moreover, in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 36, firstpreambles 201 and 501 and/or second preambles 202 and 502 includecontrol information related to use of time and frequency resourcesduring frequency division, and a configuration may be made such thatfirst preamble 3601 and/or second preamble 3602 include controlinformation related to use of time and frequency resources during time(temporal) division.

As described above, in <fifth example><sixth example>, <ninth example>and <tenth example>, there is an advantage that it is possible totransmit a small number of bits of information of time and frequencyresources being used.

Meanwhile, in <fourth example>, <seventh example> and <eighth example>,there is an advantage that it is possible to more flexibly allocate timeand frequency resources to a data symbol group.

As in the examples described above, the transmitting apparatus transmitsthe control information related to use of the time and frequencyresources during frequency division and the control information relatedto use of the time and frequency resources during time (temporal)division, and thus the receiving apparatus can learn a use status of thetime and frequency resources of data symbol groups and can accuratelydemodulate and decode data.

Sixth Exemplary Embodiment

Some examples of a frame configuration of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 are described in thefirst exemplary embodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment. A frameconfiguration different from the frame configurations described in thefirst exemplary embodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment will bedescribed in the present exemplary embodiment.

FIG. 48 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal to be transmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1.Elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 5 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 48. Moreover, in FIG. 48, a vertical axisindicates a frequency, and a horizontal axis indicates time. Note thatas with the first exemplary embodiment to the fifth exemplaryembodiment, a data symbol group may be of symbols of any of an SISOmethod (SIMO method), an MIMO method and an MISO method.

A difference of FIG. 48 from FIG. 5 is that first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202 in FIG. 5 do not exist. Then, the controlinformation symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol groups#1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol group #2 (402) in a frequencydirection. Note that the control information symbols include, forexample, a symbol for frame synchronization, frequency synchronizationand time synchronization, a symbol for notifying of frequency and timeresources to be used by each data symbol group described in the fifthexemplary embodiment, information related to a modulating method forgenerating a data symbol group, and information related to an errorcorrection method for generating a data symbol group, examples of whichinclude information related to a code, information related to a codelength, information related to a coding rate, and the like.

FIG. 49 illustrates an example of a configuration in a case where thecontrol information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol groups#1 (401_1 and 401_2) and data symbol group #2 (402) in a frequencydirection.

In FIG. 49, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. FIG. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902 and 4903 which are datasymbol groups #X. In FIG. 48, X is 1 or 2, and 4904 and 4905 are controlinformation symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control).

As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905)are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency).Note that these specific carriers may include or may not include symbolsother than the control information symbols.

For example, X=1 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

Similarly, X=2 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

Note that when there are, for example, carrier #1 to carrier #100 in acase where frequency division is performed as in FIG. 48 to arrangecontrol information symbols in frequency and time areas in which a datasymbol group is arranged, the control information symbols may bearranged on specific carriers such as carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier#40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the controlinformation symbols may be arranged according to arrangement of datasymbol groups.

Next, an advantage in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 48 willbe described.

In a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 5, the receiving apparatusneeds to obtain first preamble 201 and second preamble 202, in order todemodulate and decode data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 andto obtain information. For this reason, the receiving apparatus needs toobtain a modulated signal of a frequency band for receiving firstpreamble 201 and second preamble 202.

In such a circumstance, when there is a terminal which needs only datasymbol group #2, a frame configuration for enabling demodulation anddecoding of data symbol group #2 only with a frequency band occupied bydata symbol group #2 is desired in order to enable flexible terminaldesign, and in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 48, it ispossible to realize this frame configuration.

When a frame is configured as in FIG. 48, control information symbols,an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing ConfigurationControl), are inserted to data symbol group #2 in the frequencydirection as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receivingapparatus can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by obtainingmodulated signals of the frequency band of only data symbol group #2.Hence, flexible terminal design becomes possible.

Next, a case where a frame configuration of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is a frameconfiguration in FIG. 50 will be described. Elements operating in thesame way as in FIG. 25 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.50. Moreover, in FIG. 50, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and ahorizontal axis indicates time. Note that as with the first exemplaryembodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may beof symbols of any of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and anMISO method.

A difference of FIG. 50 from FIG. 25 is that first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202 in FIG. 25 do not exist. Then, the controlinformation symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol group#1 (2501), data symbol group #2 (2502) and data symbol group #4 (2503)in a frequency direction. Note that the control information symbolsinclude, for example, a symbol for frame synchronization, frequencysynchronization and time synchronization, a symbol for notifying offrequency and time resources to be used by each data symbol groupdescribed in the fifth exemplary embodiment, information related to amodulating method for generating a data symbol group, and informationrelated to an error correction method for generating a data symbolgroup, examples of which include information related to a code,information related to a code length, information related to a codingrate, and the like.

FIG. 49 illustrates an example of a configuration in a case where thecontrol information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol group#1 (2501), data symbol group #2 (2502) and data symbol group #4 (2503)in a frequency direction.

In FIG. 49, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. FIG. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902 and 4903 which are datasymbol groups #X. For example, in FIG. 50, X is 1, 2 or 4, and 4904 and4905 are control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC(Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control).

As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905)are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency).Note that these specific carriers may include or may not include symbolsother than the control information symbols.

For example, X=1 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

Similarly, X=2 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

X=4 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, the controlinformation symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #4.

Note that when there are, for example, carrier #1 to carrier #100 in acase where frequency division is performed as in FIG. 50 to arrangecontrol information symbols in frequency and time areas in which a datasymbol group is arranged, the control information symbols may bearranged on specific carriers such as carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier#40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the controlinformation symbols may be arranged according to arrangement of datasymbol groups.

Next, an advantage in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 50 willbe described.

In a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 25, the receiving apparatusneeds to obtain first preamble 201 and second preamble 202, in order todemodulate and decode data symbol group #1, data symbol group #2 anddata symbol group #4 and to obtain information. For this reason, thereceiving apparatus needs to obtain a modulated signal of a frequencyband for receiving first preamble 201 and second preamble 202.

In such a circumstance, when there is a terminal which needs only datasymbol group #2, a frame configuration for enabling demodulation anddecoding of data symbol group #2 only with a frequency band occupied bydata symbol group #2 is desired in order to enable flexible terminaldesign, and in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 50, it ispossible to realize this frame configuration.

When a frame is configured as in FIG. 50, control information symbols,an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing ConfigurationControl), are inserted to data symbol group #2 in the frequencydirection as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receivingapparatus can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by obtainingmodulated signals of the frequency band of only data symbol group #2.Hence, flexible terminal design becomes possible.

Next, a case where a frame configuration of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is a frameconfiguration in FIG. 51 will be described. Elements operating in thesame way as in FIG. 28 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.51. Moreover, in FIG. 51, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and ahorizontal axis indicates time. Note that as with the first exemplaryembodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may beof symbols of any of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and anMISO method.

A difference of FIG. 51 from FIG. 28 is that first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202 in FIG. 28 do not exist. Then, the controlinformation symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol group#1 (2701) and data symbol group #2 (2702) in a frequency direction. Notethat the control information symbols include, for example, a symbol forframe synchronization, frequency synchronization and timesynchronization, a symbol for notifying of frequency and time resourcesto be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplaryembodiment, information related to a modulating method for generating adata symbol group, and information related to an error correction methodfor generating a data symbol group, examples of which includeinformation related to a code, information related to a code length,information related to a coding rate, and the like.

FIG. 49 illustrates an example of a configuration in a case where thecontrol information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol group#1 (2701) and data symbol group #2 (2702) in a frequency direction.

In FIG. 49, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and a horizontal axisindicates time. FIG. 49 illustrates 4901, 4902 and 4903 which are datasymbol groups #X. For example, in FIG. 51, X is 1 or 2, and 4904 and4905 are control information symbols, an example of which is TMCC(Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control).

As illustrated in FIG. 49, control information symbols (4904 and 4905)are arranged on certain specific carriers (subcarriers or frequency).Note that these specific carriers may include or may not include symbolsother than the control information symbols.

For example, X=1 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #1.

Similarly, X=2 holds in FIG. 49. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 49, thecontrol information symbols are arranged on certain specific carriers(subcarriers or frequency) of data symbol group #2.

Note that when there are, for example, carrier #1 to carrier #100 in acase where frequency division is performed as in FIG. 51 to arrangecontrol information symbols in frequency and time areas in which a datasymbol group is arranged, the control information symbols may bearranged on specific carriers such as carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier#40, carrier #55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the controlinformation symbols may be arranged according to arrangement of datasymbol groups.

Next, an advantage in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 51 willbe described.

In a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 28, the receiving apparatusneeds to obtain first preamble 201 and second preamble 202, in order todemodulate and decode data symbol group #1 and data symbol group #2 andto obtain information. For this reason, the receiving apparatus needs toobtain a modulated signal of a frequency band for receiving firstpreamble 201 and second preamble 202.

In such a circumstance, when there is a terminal which needs only datasymbol group #2, a frame configuration for enabling demodulation anddecoding of data symbol group #2 only with a frequency band occupied bydata symbol group #2 is desired in order to enable flexible terminaldesign, and in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 51, it ispossible to realize this frame configuration.

When a frame is configured as in FIG. 51, control information symbols,an example of which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing ConfigurationControl), are inserted to data symbol group #2 in the frequencydirection as illustrated in FIG. 49. For this reason, the receivingapparatus can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 by obtainingmodulated signals of the frequency band of only data symbol group #2.Hence, flexible terminal design becomes possible.

Next, a case where a frame configuration of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is a frameconfiguration in FIG. 52 will be described. Elements operating in thesame way as in FIG. 32 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.52. Moreover, in FIG. 52, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and ahorizontal axis indicates time. Note that as with the first exemplaryembodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may beof symbols of any of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and anMISO method.

A difference of FIG. 52 from FIG. 32 is that first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202 in FIG. 32 do not exist. Then, the controlinformation symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged on data symbol group#1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003),data symbol group #4 (3004), data symbol group #5 (3005) and data symbolgroup #6 (3006) in a frequency direction. Note that the controlinformation symbols include, for example, a symbol for framesynchronization, frequency synchronization and time synchronization, asymbol for notifying of frequency and time resources to be used by eachdata symbol group described in the fifth exemplary embodiment,information related to a modulating method for generating a data symbolgroup, and information related to an error correction method forgenerating a data symbol group, examples of which include informationrelated to a code, information related to a code length, informationrelated to a coding rate, and the like.

However, the control information symbols are not necessarily arranged onall of data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), datasymbol group #3 (3003), data symbol group #4 (3004), data symbol group#5 (3005) and data symbol group #6 (3006) in the frequency direction.This point will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 53 illustrates an example of arrangement of control informationsymbols at time t1 to time t3 in FIG. 52. In a case of FIG. 52, datasymbol groups 5301, 5302 and 5303 each include any of data symbol group#1 (3001), data symbol group #2 (3002), data symbol group #3 (3003),data symbol group #4 (3004), data symbol group #5 (3005) and data symbolgroup #6 (3006).

FIG. 53 illustrates control information symbols 5304 and 5305, and thecontrol information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in a frequencydirection. Control information symbol 5304 is arranged on a specificcarrier as illustrated in FIG. 53. Moreover, control information symbol5305 is arranged on a specific carrier (subcarrier or frequency) asillustrated in FIG. 53. Note that this specific carrier may include ormay not include symbols other than the control information symbols.

When there are, for example, carrier #1 to carrier #100 in a case wherefrequency division is performed as in FIG. 52 to arrange controlinformation symbols in frequency and time areas in which a data symbolgroup is arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged onspecific carriers such as carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier#55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols maybe arranged according to arrangement of data symbol groups.

Next, an advantage in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 52 willbe described.

In a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 32, the receiving apparatusneeds to obtain first preamble 201 and second preamble 202, in order todemodulate and decode data symbol group #1 (3001), data symbol group #2(3002), data symbol group #3 (3003), data symbol group #4 (3004), datasymbol group #5 (3005) and data symbol group #6 (3006) and to obtaininformation. For this reason, the receiving apparatus needs to obtain amodulated signal of a frequency band for receiving first preamble 201and second preamble 202.

In such a circumstance, when there is a terminal which needs only datasymbol group #2, a frame configuration for enabling demodulation anddecoding of data symbol group #2 only with a frequency band occupied bydata symbol group #2 is desired in order to enable flexible terminaldesign, and in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 52, it ispossible to realize this frame configuration.

When a frame is configured as in FIG. 52, the control informationsymbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission MultiplexingConfiguration Control), are inserted to a data symbol group in thefrequency direction as illustrated in FIG. 53. For this reason, thereceiving apparatus can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 byobtaining modulated signals of the frequency bands around data symbolgroup #2. Hence, flexible terminal design becomes possible.

Next, a case where a frame configuration of a modulated signal to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus in FIG. 1 is a frameconfiguration in FIG. 54 will be described. Elements operating in thesame way as in FIG. 36 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.54. Moreover, in FIG. 54, a vertical axis indicates a frequency, and ahorizontal axis indicates time. Note that as with the first exemplaryembodiment to the fifth exemplary embodiment, a data symbol group may beof symbols of any of an SISO method (SIMO method), an MIMO method and anMISO method.

A difference of FIG. 54 from FIG. 36 is that first preamble 201 andsecond preamble 202, and first preamble 501 and second preamble 502 inFIG. 36 do not exist. Then, the control information symbols, an exampleof which is TMCC (Transmission Multiplexing Configuration Control), arearranged on data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402),data symbol group #3 (3403), data symbol group #4 (3404), data symbolgroup #5 (3405), data symbol group #6 (3406), data symbol group #7(3407), data symbol group #8 (3408), data symbol group #9 (3509), datasymbol group #10 (3510), data symbol group #11 (3511), data symbol group#12 (3512), and data symbol group #13 (3513) in a frequency direction.Note that the control information symbols include, for example, a symbolfor frame synchronization, frequency synchronization and timesynchronization, a symbol for notifying of frequency and time resourcesto be used by each data symbol group described in the fifth exemplaryembodiment, information related to a modulating method for generating adata symbol group, and information related to an error correction methodfor generating a data symbol group, examples of which includeinformation related to a code, information related to a code length,information related to a coding rate, and the like.

However, control information symbols are not necessarily arranged on allof data symbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbolgroup #3 (3403), data symbol group #4 (3404), data symbol group #5(3405), data symbol group #6 (3406), data symbol group #7 (3407), datasymbol group #8 (3408), data symbol group #9 (3509), data symbol group#10 (3510), data symbol group #11 (3511), data symbol group #12 (3512),and data symbol group #13 (3513) in the frequency direction. This pointwill be described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 53 illustrates an example of arrangement of control informationsymbols at time t1 to time t3 in FIG. 54. In a case of FIG. 54, datasymbol groups 5301, 5302 and 5303 each include any of data symbol group#1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbol group #3 (3403),data symbol group #4 (3404), data symbol group #5 (3405), data symbolgroup #6 (3406), data symbol group #7 (3407), data symbol group #8(3408), data symbol group #9 (3509), data symbol group #10 (3510), datasymbol group #11 (3511), data symbol group #12 (3512), and data symbolgroup #13 (3513).

FIG. 53 illustrates control information symbols 5304 and 5305, and thecontrol information symbols, an example of which is TMCC (TransmissionMultiplexing Configuration Control), are arranged in a frequencydirection. Control information symbol 5304 is arranged on a specificcarrier as illustrated in FIG. 53. Moreover, control information symbol5305 is arranged on a specific carrier (subcarrier or frequency) asillustrated in FIG. 53. Note that this specific carrier may include ormay not include symbols other than the control information symbols.

When there are, for example, carrier #1 to carrier #100 in a case wherefrequency division is performed as in FIG. 54 to arrange controlinformation symbols in frequency and time areas in which a data symbolgroup is arranged, the control information symbols may be arranged onspecific carriers such as carrier #5, carrier #25, carrier #40, carrier#55, carrier #70 and carrier #85, or the control information symbols maybe arranged according to arrangement of data symbol groups.

Next, an advantage in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 54 willbe described.

In a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 36, the receiving apparatusneeds to obtain first preamble 201, second preamble 202, first preamble501 and second preamble 502, in order to demodulate and decode datasymbol group #1 (3401), data symbol group #2 (3402), data symbol group#3 (3403), data symbol group #4 (3404), data symbol group #5 (3405),data symbol group #6 (3406), data symbol group #7 (3407), data symbolgroup #8 (3408), data symbol group #9 (3509), data symbol group #10(3510), data symbol group #11 (3511), data symbol group #12 (3512), anddata symbol group #13 (3513) and to obtain information. For this reason,the receiving apparatus needs to obtain a modulated signal of afrequency band for receiving first preamble 201, second preamble 202,first preamble 501 and second preamble 502.

In such a circumstance, when there is a terminal which needs only datasymbol group #2, a frame configuration for enabling demodulation anddecoding of data symbol group #2 only with a frequency band occupied bydata symbol group #2 is desired in order to enable flexible terminaldesign, and in a case of the frame configuration in FIG. 54, it ispossible to realize this frame configuration.

When a frame is configured as in FIG. 54, the control informationsymbols, an example of which is TMCC (Transmission MultiplexingConfiguration Control), are arranged on a data symbol group in thefrequency direction as illustrated in FIG. 53. For this reason, thereceiving apparatus can demodulate and decode data symbol group #2 byobtaining modulated signals of the frequency bands around data symbolgroup #2. Hence, flexible terminal design becomes possible.

As in the above-described example, when a data symbol group is arrangedby using frequency division, control information symbols are arranged inthe frequency direction, and thus it is possible to obtain an effect ofenabling flexible terminal design. Note that the control informationsymbols related to a data symbol group arranged by using time (temporal)division are contained in the first preamble and the second preamble asillustrated in FIGS. 48, 50, 51, 52 and 54.

Note that control information related to a data symbol group subjectedto frequency division may be contained in the first preamble and thesecond preamble, or control information related to a data symbol groupsubjected to time (temporal) division may be contained in controlinformation symbols (4904, 4905, 5304 and 5305) illustrated in FIGS. 49and 53.

Seventh Exemplary Embodiment

The case where phase change is performed on a modulated signal isdescribed in the first exemplary embodiment to the sixth exemplaryembodiment, in particular, in the first exemplary embodiment. In thepresent exemplary embodiment, a method for performing phase change on adata symbol group subjected to frequency division will be described inparticular.

The first exemplary embodiment describes the phase change that isperformed on all of baseband signals s1(t) and s1(i) and basebandsignals s2(t) and s2(i) or either baseband signals s1(t) and s1(i) orbaseband signals s2(t) and s2(i). As features of the present method,phase change is not performed on, for example, pilot symbols (examplesof which include a reference symbol, a unique word and a postamble), afirst preamble, a second preamble and control information symbols otherthan symbols for transmitting baseband signal s1(t) and baseband signals2(t) in a transmission frame.

Then, there are the following cases in a method for performing phasechange on a data symbol group subjected to frequency division, whichincludes “performing phase change on all of baseband signals s1(t) ands1(i) and baseband signals s2(t) and s2(i) or either baseband signalss1(t) and s1(i) or baseband signals s2(t) and s2(i).”

First Case:

A first case will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In FIG. 55, avertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axis indicates afrequency. Part (A) of FIG. 55 illustrates a frame configuration ofmodulated signals z1(t) and z1(i) in the first exemplary embodiment.Part (B) of FIG. 55 illustrates a frame configuration of modulatedsignals z2(t) and z2(i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Symbols ofmodulated signals z1(t) and z1(i) and symbols of modulated signals z2(t)and z2(i) of the same time and the same frequency (the same carriernumber) are transmitted from different antennas.

In FIG. 55, symbols described as “P” are pilot symbols, and as describedabove, phase change is not performed on the pilot symbols. In (A) and(B) of FIG. 55, symbols other than the symbols described as “P” aresymbols for transmitting data, namely data symbols. Note that in (A) and(B) of FIG. 55, a frame is configured with the data symbols and thepilot symbols, but this configuration is only an example, and asdescribed above, symbols such as control information symbols may becontained. In this case, phase change is not performed on the controlinformation symbols, for example.

Part (A) of FIG. 55 illustrates area 5501 on which data symbolsbelonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged, and area 5502 on whichdata symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. Then, (B)of FIG. 55 illustrates area 5503 on which data symbols belonging to datasymbol group #1 are arranged, and area 5504 on which data symbolsbelonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. As a result, in theexamples in FIG. 55, the data symbol groups are subjected to frequencydivision and are arranged.

In the data symbol groups in FIG. 55, there are 7 cycles of phasechange, and any phase change of 7 types of “phase change $0, phasechange $1, phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phasechange $5 and phase change $6” is performed.

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5501 in (A) of FIG. 55, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “#0 $0.” In this case, “#0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $1.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5502 in (A) of FIG. 55, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “%0 $0.” In this case, “%0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 $1.” In this case, “%1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of datasymbol group #2. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phasechange $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5503 in (B) of FIG. 55, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “#0 $0.” In this case, “#0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $1.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5504 in (B) of FIG. 55, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “%0 $0.” In this case, “%0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 $1.” In this case, “%1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of datasymbol group #2. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phasechange $Y.”

In this case, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in a data symbol ofmodulated signal z1. For example, “phase change of (2×0×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $0,” “phase change of (2×1×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $1,” “phase change of (2×2×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $2,” “phase change of (2×3×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $3,” “phase change of (2×4×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $4,” “phase change of (2×5×π)/14 radians isperformed as phase change $5,” and “phase change of (2×6×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $6” (however, a phase change value is notlimited to these values).

Then, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in a data symbol ofmodulated signal z2. For example, “phase change of −(2×0×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $0,” “phase change of −(2×1×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $1,” “phase change of −(2×2×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $2,” “phase change of −(2×3×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $3,” “phase change of −(2×4×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $4,” “phase change of −(2×5×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $5,” and “phase change of −(2×6×π)/14radians is performed as phase change $6” (however, a phase change valueis not limited to these values).

Note that as described above, phase change may be performed on modulatedsignal z1, and may not be performed on modulated signal z2. Moreover,phase change may not be performed on modulated signal z1, and phasechange may be performed on modulated signal z2.

Features of the first case are such that “7 cycles of phase change areperformed in data symbol group #1 together with data symbol group #2.”That is, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in data symbols of anentire frame, regardless of a belonging data symbol group.

Second Case:

A second case will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, avertical axis indicates time, and a horizontal axis indicates afrequency. Part (B) of FIG. 56 illustrates a frame configuration ofmodulated signals z1(t) and z1(i) in the first exemplary embodiment.Part (B) of FIG. 56 illustrates a frame configuration of modulatedsignals z2(t) and z2(i) in the first exemplary embodiment. Symbols ofmodulated signals z1(t) and z1(i) and symbols of modulated signals z2(t)and z2(i) of the same time and the same frequency, namely the samecarrier number are transmitted from different antennas.

In FIG. 56, symbols described as “P” are pilot symbols, and as describedabove, phase change is not performed on the pilot symbols. In (A) and(B) of FIG. 56, symbols other than the symbols described as “P” aresymbols for transmitting data, namely data symbols. Note that in (A) and(B) of FIG. 56, a frame is configured with the data symbols and thepilot symbols, but this configuration is only an example, and asdisclosed above, symbols such as control information symbols may becontained. In this case, phase change is not performed on the controlinformation symbols, for example.

Part (A) of FIG. 56 illustrates area 5501 on which data symbolsbelonging to data symbol group #1 are arranged, and area 5502 on whichdata symbols belonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. Then, (B)of FIG. 56 illustrates area 5503 on which data symbols belonging to datasymbol group #1 are arranged, and area 5504 on which data symbolsbelonging to data symbol group #2 are arranged. As a result, in theexample in FIG. 56, the data symbol groups are subjected to frequencydivision and are arranged.

In data symbol group #1 in FIG. 56, there are 7 cycles of phase change,and any phase change of 7 types of “phase change $0, phase change $1,phase change $2, phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5 andphase change $6” is performed. Then, in data symbol group #2 in FIG. 56,there are 5 cycles of phase change, and any phase change of 5 types of“phase change ♭ 0, phase change ♭ 1, phase change ♭ 2, phase change ♭ 3and phase change ♭ 4” is performed.

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5501 in (A) of FIG. 56, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “#0 $0.” In this case, “#0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $1.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5502 in (A) of FIG. 56, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “%0 ♭ 0.” In this case, “%0”means a “0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “♭ 0” meansperforming phase change of “phase change ♭ 0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 ♭ 1.” In this case, “%1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “♭ 1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change ♭ 1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X ♭ Y” (X is an integer equalto or more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equalto or less than 4). In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of datasymbol group #2. Then, “♭ Y” means performing phase change of “phasechange ♭ Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5503 in (B) of FIG. 56, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “#0 $0.” In this case, “#0” meansa “0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $1.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5504 in (B) of FIG. 56, thereis, for example, a symbol described as “%0 ♭ 0.” In this case, “%0”means a “0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “♭ 0” meansperforming phase change of “phase change ♭ 0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 ♭ 1.” In this case, “%1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “♭ 1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change ♭ 1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X ♭ Y” (X is an integer equalto or more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equalto or less than 4). In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of datasymbol group #2. Then, “♭ Y” means performing phase change of “phasechange ♭ Y.”

In this case, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in data symbolgroup #1 of modulated signal z1. For example, “phase change of(2×0×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $0,” “phase change of(2×1×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $1,” “phase change of(2×2×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $2,” “phase change of(2×3×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $3,” “phase change of(2×4×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $4,” “phase change of(2×5×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $5,” and “phase changeof (2×6×π)/14 radians is performed as phase change $6” (however, a phasechange value is not limited to these values).

Then, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in data symbol group #1 ofmodulated signal z2. For example, “phase change of −(2×0×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $0,” “phase change of −(2×1×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $1,” “phase change of −(2×2×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $2,” “phase change of −(2×3×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $3,” “phase change of −(2×4×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $4,” “phase change of −(2×5×π)/14 radiansis performed as phase change $5,” and “phase change of −(2×6×π)/14radians is performed as phase change $6”. However, a phase change valueis not limited to these values.

Note that as described above, phase change may be performed in datasymbol group #1 of modulated signal z1, and may not be performed in datasymbol group #1 of modulated signal z2. Moreover, phase change may notbe performed in data symbol group #1 of modulated signal z1, and phasechange may be performed in data symbol group #1 of modulated signal z2.

Then, 5 cycles of phase change are performed in data symbol group #2 ofmodulated signal z1. For example, “phase change of (2×0×π)/10 radians isperformed as phase change ♭ 0,” “phase change of (2×1×π)/10 radians isperformed as phase change ♭ 1,” “phase change of (2×2×π)/10 radians isperformed as phase change ♭ 2,” “phase change of (2×3×π)/10 radians isperformed as phase change ♭ 3,” and “phase change of (2×4×π)/10 radiansis performed as phase change ♭ 4”. However, a phase change value is notlimited to these values.

Then, 5 cycles of phase change are performed in data symbol group #2 ofmodulated signal z2. For example, “phase change of −(2×0×π)/10 radiansis performed as phase change ♭ 0,” “phase change of −(2×1×π)/10 radiansis performed as phase change ♭ 1,” “phase change of −(2×2×π)/10 radiansis performed as phase change ♭ 2,” “phase change of −(2×3×π)/10 radiansis performed as phase change ♭ 3,” and “phase change of −(2×4×π)/10radians is performed as phase change ♭ 4”. However, a phase change valueis not limited to these values.

Note that as described above, phase change may be performed in datasymbol group #2 of modulated signal z1, and may not be performed in datasymbol group #2 of modulated signal z2. Moreover, phase change may notbe performed in data symbol group #2 of modulated signal z1, and phasechange may be performed in data symbol group #2 of modulated signal z2.

Features of the second case are such that “7 cycles of phase change areperformed in data symbol group #1, and also 5 cycles of phase change areperformed in data symbol group #2.” That is, unique phase change isperformed in each data symbol group. However, the same phase change maybe performed in different data symbols.

Third Case:

FIG. 57 illustrates a relationship between a transmission station and aterminal in a case of a third case. Terminal #3 (5703) can receivemodulated signal #1 to be transmitted by transmission station #1 (5701),and modulated signal #2 to be transmitted by transmission station #2(5702). For example, in frequency band A, the same data is transmittedin modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. That is, when a basebandsignal mapped on a data sequence by a certain modulating method is s1(t,f), transmission station #1 and transmission station #2 both transmitmodulated signals based on s1(t, f). Note that t represents time and frepresents a frequency.

Hence, terminal #3 (5703) receives both of the modulated signaltransmitted by transmission station #1 and the modulated signaltransmitted by transmission station #2 in frequency band A, anddemodulates and decodes data.

FIG. 58 is an example of a configuration of transmission station #1 andtransmission station #2. A case where transmission station #1 andtransmission station #2 both transmit modulated signals based on s1(t,f) as in frequency band A as described above will be discussed.

Error correction encoder 5802 receives an input of information 5801 andsignal 5813 related to a transmitting method. Error correction encoder5802 performs error correction coding based on information related to anerror correction coding method and contained in signal 5813 related tothe transmitting method. Error correction encoder 5802 outputs data5803.

Mapper 5804 receives an input of data 5803 and signal 5813 related tothe transmitting method. Mapper 5804 performs mapping based oninformation related to the modulating method and contained in signal5813 related to the transmitting method. Mapper 5804 outputs basebandsignal s1(t, f) 5805. Note that data interleaving, that is, data orderrearrangement may be performed between error correction encoder 5802 andmapper 5804.

Control information symbol generator 5807 receives an input of controlinformation 5806, and information 5813 related to the transmittingmethod. Control information symbol generator 5807 generates a controlinformation symbol based on information related to the transmittingmethod and contained in signal 5813 related to the transmitting method.Control information symbol generator 5807 outputs baseband signal 5808of the control information symbol.

Pilot symbol generator 5809 receives an input of signal 5813 related tothe transmitting method. Pilot symbol generator 5809 generates a pilotsymbol based on signal 5813. Pilot symbol generator 5809 outputsbaseband signal 5810 of a pilot symbol.

Transmitting method instructing unit 5812 receives an input oftransmitting method instruction information 5811. Transmitting methodinstructing unit 5812 generates and outputs signal 5813 related to thetransmitting method.

Phase changer 5814 receives an input of baseband signal s1(t, f) 5805,baseband signal 5808 of the control information symbol, baseband signal5810 of the pilot symbol, and signal 5813 related to the transmittingmethod. Phase changer 5814 performs phase change based on information ofa frame configuration contained in signal 5813 related to thetransmitting method, and based on information related to phase change.Phase changer 5814 outputs baseband signal 5815 based on a frameconfiguration. Note that details will be described below with referenceto FIGS. 59 and 60.

Radio unit 5816 receives an input of baseband signal 5815 based on theframe configuration, and signal 5813 related to the transmitting method.Radio unit 5816 performs processing such as interleaving, inverseFourier transform and frequency conversion based on signal 5813 relatedto the transmitting method. Radio unit 5816 generates and outputstransmission signal 5817. Transmission signal 5817 is output as a radiowave from antenna 5818.

FIG. 59 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal (transmission signal) to be transmitted by the transmissionstation in FIG. 58. In FIG. 59, a vertical axis indicates time, and ahorizontal axis indicates a frequency. In FIG. 59, symbols described as“P” are pilot symbols, and as features of the third case, phase changeis performed on the pilot symbols. Moreover, symbols described as “C”are control information symbols, and as features of the third case,phase change is performed on the control information symbols. Note thatFIG. 59 is an example in a case where control information symbols arearranged in a time axis direction.

In a frame in FIG. 59, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any phasechange of 7 types of “phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2,phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5 and phase change $6”is performed.

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 5901 in FIG. 59, there is,for example, a symbol described as “#0 $1.” In this case, “#0” means a“0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” means performing phasechange of “phase change $1.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $2.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$2” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $2.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 5902 in FIG. 59, there is,for example, a symbol described as “%0 $3.” In this case, “%0” means a“0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$3” means performing phasechange of “phase change $3.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 $4.” In this case, “% l”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$4” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $4.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X $Y”. X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6. In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #2. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

Moreover, in FIG. 59, there is a symbol described as “C $0.” In thiscase, “C” means a control information symbol, and “$0” means performingphase change of “phase change $0.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “C $Y”. Y is an integer equal toor more than 0 and equal to or less than 6. In this case, “C” means acontrol information symbol, and “$Y” means performing phase change of“phase change $Y.”

Moreover, in FIG. 59, there are symbols described as “P $0,” forexample. In this case, “P” means a pilot symbol, and “$0” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $0.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “P $Y” (Y is an integer equal toor more than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, “P” means apilot symbol, and “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change$Y.”

In this case, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in a data symbol ofa modulated signal. For example, “phase change of (2×0×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $0,” “phase change of (2×1×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $1,” “phase change of (2×2×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $2,” “phase change of (2×3×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $3,” “phase change of (2×4×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $4,” “phase change of (2×5×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $5,” and “phase change of (2×6×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $6”. However, a phase change value is notlimited to these values.

Note that in modulated signal #1 to be transmitted by transmissionstation #1 (5701) and modulated signal #2 to be transmitted bytransmission station #2 (5702) in FIG. 57, phase change may be performedon both of modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. However,different types of phase change may be performed on modulated signal #1and modulated signal #2. Note that phase change values may be different,and a cycle of the phase change of modulated signal #1 and a cycle ofthe phase change of modulated signal #2 may be different. Moreover,phase change may be performed on modulated signal #1, and may not beperformed on modulated signal #2. Then, phase change may not beperformed on modulated signal #1, and phase change may be performed onmodulated signal #2.

FIG. 60 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal (transmission signal) to be transmitted by the transmissionstation in FIG. 58. In FIG. 60, a vertical axis indicates time, and ahorizontal axis indicates a frequency. In FIG. 60, symbols described as“P” are pilot symbols, and as features of the third case, phase changeis performed on the pilot symbols. Moreover, symbols described as “C”are control information symbols, and as features of the third case,phase change is performed on the control information symbols. Note thatFIG. 60 is an example in a case where control information symbols arearranged in a frequency axis direction.

In a frame in FIG. 60, there are 7 cycles of phase change, and any phasechange of 7 types of “phase change $0, phase change $1, phase change $2,phase change $3, phase change $4, phase change $5 and phase change $6”is performed.

In symbols of data symbol group #1 in area 6001 in FIG. 60, there is,for example, a symbol described as “#0 $0.” In this case, “#0” means a“0th symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$0” means performing phasechange of “phase change $0.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “#1 $1.” In this case, “#1”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #1. Then, “$1” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $1.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “#X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “#X” means an “Xth symbol” of data symbolgroup #1. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change $Y.”

In symbols of data symbol group #2 in area 6002 in FIG. 60, there is,for example, a symbol described as “%0 $2.” In this case, “%0” means a“0th symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$2” means performing phasechange of “phase change $2.”

Moreover, there is a symbol described as “%1 $3.” In this case, “% l”means a “1st symbol” of data symbol group #2. Then, “$3” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $3.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “% X $Y” (X is an integer equal toor more than 0, and Y is an integer equal to or more than 0 and equal toor less than 6). In this case, “% X” means an “Xth symbol” of datasymbol group #2. Then, “$Y” means performing phase change of “phasechange $Y.”

Moreover, in FIG. 60, there is a symbol described as “C $3,” forexample. In this case, “C” means a control information symbol, and “$3”means performing phase change of “phase change $3.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “C $Y” (Y is an integer equal toor more than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, “C” means acontrol information symbol, and “$Y” means performing phase change of“phase change $Y.”

Moreover, in FIG. 59, there is a symbol described as “P $3,” forexample. In this case, “P” means a pilot symbol, and “$3” meansperforming phase change of “phase change $3.”

Hence, there are symbols described as “P $Y” (Y is an integer equal toor more than 0 and equal to or less than 6). In this case, “P” means apilot symbol, and “$Y” means performing phase change of “phase change$Y.”

In this case, 7 cycles of phase change are performed in a data symbol ofa modulated signal. For example, “phase change of (2×0×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $0,” “phase change of (2×1×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $1,” “phase change of (2×2×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $2,” “phase change of (2×3×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $3,” “phase change of (2×4×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $4,” “phase change of (2×5×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $5,” and “phase change of (2×6×π)/7 radians isperformed as phase change $6”. However, a phase change value is notlimited to these values.

Note that in modulated signal #1 to be transmitted by transmissionstation #1 (5701) and modulated signal #2 to be transmitted bytransmission station #2 (5702) in FIG. 57, phase change may be performedon both of modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2. However,different types of phase change may be performed on modulated signal #1and modulated signal #2. Note that phase change values may be different,and a cycle of the phase change of modulated signal #1 and a cycle ofthe phase change of modulated signal #2 may be different. Moreover,phase change may be performed on modulated signal #1, and may not beperformed on modulated signal #1. Then, phase change may not beperformed on modulated signal #1, and phase change may be performed onmodulated signal #1.

FIGS. 59 and 60 each illustrate the 7 cycles of phase change, as anexample. However, a value of the cycle is not limited to this exampleand may be another value. Moreover, the cycle of phase change may beformed in the frequency axis direction or in the time direction.

Moreover, when phase change is performed for each symbol in FIGS. 59 and60, there may be no cycle of phase change.

Note that the configuration of transmission stations #1 and #2 in FIG.57 is not limited to the configuration in FIG. 58. Another configurationexample will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

Elements operating in the same way as in FIG. 58 are assigned the samereference numerals in FIG. 61, and will not be described. Features ofFIG. 61 are such that another apparatus transmits data 5803, controlinformation 5806 and transmitting method instruction information 5811,and receiver 6102 in FIG. 61 performs demodulation and decoding toobtain data 5803, control information 5806 and transmitting methodinstruction information 5811. Hence, receiver 6102 receives a modulatedsignal transmitted by another apparatus, receives an input of receivedsignal 6101, and demodulates and decodes received signal 6101 to outputdata 5803, control information 5806, and transmitting method instructioninformation 5811.

Features of the third case are such that “7 cycles of phase change areperformed in data symbol group #1 together with data symbol group #2 andsymbols other than data symbols.” That is, 7 cycles of phase change areperformed in symbols of an entire frame. Note that the symbols otherthan data symbols are control information symbols and pilot symbols in acase of FIGS. 59 and 60, but there may be symbols other than controlinformation symbols and pilot symbols.

For example, the transmitting apparatus (transmission station) in FIG. 1selects and carries out any of the above-described first case, secondcase and third case. As a matter of course, the transmitting apparatusin FIG. 1 performs the operations described with reference to FIGS. 58and 61 when the transmitting apparatus selects the third case.

As described above, the transmitting apparatus can favorably obtain adiversity effect in each data symbol group by carrying out anappropriate phase change method in each transmitting method. For thisreason, the receiving apparatus can obtain an effect of making itpossible to obtain good data reception quality.

Note that as a matter of course, the transmitting apparatus(transmission station) may carry out any of the above-described firstcase, second case and third case alone.

Exemplary Embodiment A

FIG. 63 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when thehorizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency, and the same reference numerals are assigned to elementsoperating in the same way as those in FIGS. 2 and 34.

Preambles are transmitted in a period from time t0 to time t1, symbolgroups subjected to time division (time division multiplexing (TDM)) aretransmitted in a period from time t1 to time t2, and symbol groupssubjected to time-frequency division multiplexing (TFDM) are transmittedin a period from time t2 to time t3.

In the case of TDM, the number of symbols (or slots) included in eachdata symbol group #TDX is the number of symbols (or slots) in which datacorresponding to an integral multiple of an FEC block (having a blocklength of an error correction code (a code length of an error correctioncode)) is fitted.

For example, when the block length of an error correction code is 64800bits and the number of bits for transmitting each symbol of a datasymbol group is 4, the number of symbols necessary to transmit 64800bits that indicate the block length of the error correction code is16200 symbols. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols ofdata symbol group #TDX is 16200×N (N is an integer greater than or equalto 1). Note that the number of bits for transmitting each symbol is 4when the single-input single-output (SISO) method and 16QAM are used.

In another example, when the block length of an error correction code is64800 bits and the number of bits for transmitting each symbol of a datasymbol group is 6, the number of symbols necessary to transmit 64800bits that indicate the block length of the error correction code is10800 symbols. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols ofdata symbol group #TDX is 10800×N (N is an integer greater than or equalto 1). Note that when the SISO method and 64QAM are used, the number ofbits for transmitting each symbol is 6.

In yet another example, when the block length of an error correctioncode is 64800 bits, and the number of bits for transmitting each slot ofa data symbol group is 8, the number of slots necessary to transmit64800 bits that indicate the block length of the error correction codeis 8100. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of slots of data symbolgroup #TDX is 8100×N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). Notethat when the MIMO method is used, the modulation method for stream 1 is16QAM, and the modulation method for stream 2 is 16QAM, the number ofbits for transmitting each slot which includes one symbol of stream 1and one symbol of stream 2 is 8.

Among symbol groups subjected to time division in a period from time t1to time t2 in FIG. 63, data symbol group #TD1, data symbol group #TD2,data symbol group #TD3, data symbol group #TD4, and data symbol group#TD5 each satisfy that the number of symbols (slots) included in a datasymbol group is the number of symbols (slots) in which datacorresponding to an integral multiple of an FEC block (having a blocklength of an error correction code (a code length of an error correctioncode)) is fitted, as described above. The symbol groups are arranged inthe time axis direction.

In FIG. 63, the number of carriers along the frequency axis is 64.Accordingly, carriers from carrier 1 to carrier 64 are present.

For example, with regard to data symbol group #TD1, the arrangement ofdata symbols starts from “time $1, carrier 1”, and subsequently, datasymbols are arranged at “time $1, carrier 2”, “time $1, carrier 3”,“time $1, carrier 4”, . . . , “time $1, carrier 63”, “time $1, carrier64”, “time $2, carrier 1”, “time $2, carrier 2”, “time $2, carrier 3”,“time $2, carrier 4”, . . . , “time $2, carrier 63”, “time $2, carrier64”, “time $3, carrier 1”, and so on.

With regard to data symbol group #TD3, the arrangement of data symbolsstarts from “time $6000, carrier 1”, and subsequently data symbols arearranged at “time $6000, carrier 2”, “time $6000, carrier 3”, “time$6000, carrier 4”, . . . , “time $6000, carrier 63”, “time $6000,carrier 64”, “time $6001, carrier 1”, “time $6001, carrier 2”, “time$6001, carrier 3”, “time $6001, carrier 4”, . . . , “time $6001, carrier63”, “time $6001, carrier 64”, “time $6002, carrier 1”, and so on, andthe arrangement of symbols is completed when a symbol is arranged at“time $7000, carrier 20.”

Then, with regard to data symbol group #TD4, the arrangement of datasymbols starts from “time $7000, carrier 21.”

Furthermore, data symbols in data symbol groups #TD4 and TD#5 arearranged in accordance with the same rule, and the last symbol of datasymbol group #TD5 which is the last data symbol group is arranged attime $10000 at carrier 32.

Then, dummy symbols are arranged at carriers from carrier 33 to carrier64 at time $10000. Accordingly, symbols at carrier 1 to carrier 64 areto be transmitted also at time $10000. Note that each of the dummysymbols has a certain value for in-phase component I and also a certainvalue for quadrature component Q.

For example, in-phase component I of a dummy symbol may be generatedusing a pseudo-random sequence which includes “0” and “1”, andquadrature component Q of the dummy symbol may be 0. In this case, apseudo-random sequence is initialized at a position of a first dummysymbol, and in-phase component I may be converted into one of the values+1 and −1, based on in-phase component I=2 (½−pseudo-random sequence).

Alternatively, quadrature component Q of a dummy symbol may be generatedusing a pseudo-random sequence which includes “0” and “1”, andquadrature component I of the dummy symbol may be 0. In this case, apseudo-random sequence is initialized at a position of a first dummysymbol, and quadrature component Q may be converted into one of thevalues +1 and −1, based on quadrature component Q=2 (½−pseudo-randomsequence).

Furthermore, an in-phase component of a dummy symbol may be set to areal number other than zero, and a quadrature component of the dummysymbol may be set to a real number other than zero.

A method for generating a dummy symbol is not limited to the above. Thedescription with regard to a dummy symbol here is also applicable todummy symbols later described.

According to the above rule, dummy symbols are arranged in a timesection (from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 63) in which time division isperformed.

The time-frequency division multiplexing (TFDM) method is to bedescribed with reference to FIG. 63.

A period from time t2 to time t3 in FIG. 63 shows an example of a frameconfiguration in which time-frequency division multiplexing isperformed.

At time $10001, data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) and data symbol #TFD2(3402) are subjected to frequency division multiplexing, and data symbolgroup #TFD2 (3402), data symbol group #TFD3 (3403), and data symbolgroup #TFD6 (3406) are subjected to time division multiplexing atcarrier 11. Accordingly, a period from time t2 to time t3 includes aportion on which frequency division is performed and a portion on whichtime division multiplexing is performed, and thus the method is named“time-frequency division multiplexing”, here.

Data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) is present at time $10001 to time $14000,i is greater than or equal to 10001 and less than or equal to 14000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD2 (3402) is present at time $10001 to time $11000,i is greater than or equal to 10001 and less than or equal to 11000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 11 to carrier 64 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD3 (3403) is present at time $11001 to time $13000,i is greater than or equal to 11001 and less than or equal to 13000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 11 to carrier 35 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD4 (3404) is present at time $11001 to time $12000,i is greater than or equal to 11001 and less than or equal to 12000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 36 to carrier 64 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD5 (3405) is present at time $12001 to time $13000,i is greater than or equal to 12001 and less than or equal to 13000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 36 to carrier 64 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD6 (3406) is present at time $13001 to time $14000,i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 11 to carrier 30 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD7 (3407) is present at time $13001 to time $14000,i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, anddata symbol are present at carrier 31 to carrier 50 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

Data symbol group #TFD8 (3408) is present at time $13001 to time $14000,i is greater than or equal to 13001 and less than or equal to 14000, anddata symbols are present at carrier 51 to carrier 64 at time i whichsatisfies the above.

The time-frequency division multiplexing method has a feature that thecarrier number of an occupied carrier is the same for a data symbolgroup in all the time sections in which data symbols of the data symbolgroup are present.

The number of symbols (or the number of slots) included in data symbolgroup #TFDX is U. U is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

First, “V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1) which denotesthe number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data having anintegral multiple of a block length of an error correction code (a codelength of an error correction code) is fitted” is secured. Note thatU−α+1≤V≤U is to be satisfied (a denotes the number of symbols (or thenumber of slots) necessary to transmit a block having a block length (acode length) of an error correction code (unit: bits), and is an integergreater than or equal to 1).

When U−V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U−V symbols (or U−V slots)are added. Thus, data symbol group #TFDX includes data symbols that areV symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols that are U−V symbols (or U−Vslots) (each dummy symbol has a certain value for in-phase component I,and also a certain value for quadrature component Q).

All the data symbol groups subjected to time-frequency divisionmultiplexing each satisfy that “a data symbol group includes datasymbols that are V symbols (or V slots) and dummy symbols that are U−Vsymbols (or U−V slots)”.

Specifically, when data symbol groups subjected to time-frequencydivision multiplexing needs to have dummy symbols (or dummy slots),dummy symbols (dummy slots) are inserted in data symbol groupsseparately.

FIG. 64 illustrates an example of a state in which dummy symbols (ordummy slots) are inserted in, for example, data symbol group #TFD1(3401) in FIG. 63.

In data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), data symbols are arrangedpreferentially from a position having a smaller time index. A rule thatif data symbols are arranged at all the occupied carriers at a certaintime, data symbols are arranged at carriers at a time subsequent to thecertain time is adopted.

For example, with regard to data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), a datasymbol is arranged at carrier 1 at time $10001, and thereafter datasymbols are arranged at carrier 2 at time $10001, carrier 3 at time$10001, . . . , carrier 9 at time $10001, and carrier 10 at time $10001,as illustrated in FIG. 64. Then, moving on to time $10002, data symbolsare arranged at carrier 1 at time $10002, carrier 2 at time $10002, andso on.

With regard to data symbol arrangement at time $13995, data symbols arearranged at carrier 1 at time $13995, carrier 2 at time $13995, carrier3 at time $13995, carrier 4 at time $13995, carrier 5 at time $13995,and carrier 6 at time $13995. This completes arrangement of datasymbols.

However, there are symbols as data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) at carrier7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time $13995, carrier 1 tocarrier 10 at time $13996, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13997,carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13998, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time$13999, and carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $14000. Thus, dummy symbolsare arranged at carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time$13995, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13996, carrier 1 to carrier 10at time $13997, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13998, carrier 1 tocarrier 10 at time $13999, and carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $14000.

Following the same method as described above, dummy symbols are arrangedif necessary also in data symbol group #TFD2 (3402), data symbol group#TFD3 (3403), data symbol group #TFD4 (3404), data symbol group #TFD5(3405), data symbol group #TFD6 (3406), data symbol group #TFD7 (3407),and data symbol group #TFD8 (3408) in FIG. 63.

As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methodsfor a frame subjected to time division multiplexing and a framesubjected to time-frequency division multiplexing, and thus a receivingapparatus can readily sort out data symbols, and demodulate and decodedata. Furthermore, an advantageous effect of preventing fall of a datatransmission rate due to dummy symbols can be achieved.

Note that a frame configuration in which “preambles”, “symbols subjectedto time division”, and “symbols subjected to time-frequency division”are arranged in this order along the time axis is described based on theexample in FIG. 63, yet the present disclosure is not limited to this.For example, a frame configuration in which “preambles”, “symbolssubjected to time-frequency division, and “symbols subjected to timedivision” are arranged in this order may be adopted, and may alsoinclude symbols other than the symbols illustrated in FIG. 63.

For example, in FIG. 63, “preambles” may be inserted between “symbolssubjected to time division” and “symbols subjected to time-frequencydivision”, or other symbols may be inserted between “symbols subjectedto time division” and “symbols subjected to time-frequency division”.

FIG. 65 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in which thehorizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency, and the same reference numerals are assigned to elementsoperating in the same way as those in FIGS. 2 and 34.

Preambles are transmitted in a period from time t0 to time t1, symbolgroups subjected to frequency division (frequency division multiplexing(FDM)) are transmitted in a period from time t1 to time t2, and symbolgroups subjected to time-frequency division multiplexing (TFDM) aretransmitted in a period from time t2 to time t3.

In the case of FDM, the number of symbols (or the number of slots)included in each data symbol group #FDX is the number of symbols (or thenumber of slots) in which data corresponding to an integral multiple ofa FEC block (having a block length of an error correction code or a codelength of an error correction code) is fitted.

For example, when the block length of an error correction code is 64800bits and the number of bits for transmitting each symbol of a datasymbol group is 4, the number of symbols necessary to transmit 64800bits that indicate the block length of an error correction code is 16200symbols. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols included indata symbol group #FDX is 16200×N (N is an integer greater than or equalto 1). Note that when the single-input single-output (SISO) method and16QAM are used, the number of bits for transmitting each symbol is 4.

In another example, when the block length of an error correction code is64800 bits and the number of bits for transmitting each symbol of a datasymbol group is 6, the number of symbols necessary to transmit 64800bits that indicate the block length of an error correction code is10800. Accordingly, in such a case, the number of symbols of data symbolgroup #FDX is 10800×N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). Notethat when the SISO method and 64QAM are used, the number of bits fortransmitting each symbol is 6.

In yet another example, when the block length of an error correctioncode is 64800 bits and the number of bits for transmitting each slot ofa data symbol group is 8, the number of slots necessary to transmit64800 bits that indicate the block length of an error correction code is8100. Thus, in such a case, the number of slots of data symbol group#FDX is 8100×N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 1). Note thatwhen the MIMO method is used and a modulation method for stream 1 is16QAM, whereas a modulation method for stream 2 is 16QAM, the number ofbits for transmitting each slot which includes one symbol of stream 1and one symbol of stream 2 is 8.

In a period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 65, the number of symbols(or the number of slots) in each of data symbol group #FD1, data symbolgroup #FD2, data symbol group #FD3, and data symbol group #FD4 subjectedto frequency division satisfies “the number of symbols (or the number ofslots) in which data corresponding to an integral multiple of a FECblock (having a block length of an error correction code or a codelength of an error correction code) is fitted”, as described above.Symbol groups are arranged along the frequency axis.

In FIG. 65, the number of carriers along the frequency axis is 64.Accordingly, carrier 1 to carrier 64 are present.

For example, data symbol group #FD1 includes data symbols at carrier 1to carrier 15 from time $1 to time $10000.

Data symbol group #FD2 includes data symbols at carrier 16 to carrier 29from time $1 to time $10000, and data symbols at carrier 30 from time $1to time $6000.

Data symbol group #FD3 includes data symbols at carrier 30 from time$6001 to time $10000, data symbols at carrier 31 to carrier 44 from time$1 to time $10000, and data symbols at carrier 45 from time $1 to time$7000.

Data symbol group #FD4 includes data symbols at carrier 45 from time$7001 to time $10000, data symbols at carrier 46 to carrier 63 from time$1 to time $10000, and data symbols at carrier 64 from time $1 to time$6000.

The last data symbol group among data symbol groups arranged along thefrequency axis is data symbol group #4, and the last symbol is atcarrier 64 at time $6000.

Then, arrangement of dummy symbols starts at time $6001 at carrier 64.Thus, dummy symbols are arranged at carrier 64 from time $6001 to time$10000. Note that each dummy symbol has a certain value for in-phasecomponent I, and also has a certain value for quadrature component Q.

According to the above rule, dummy symbols are arranged in a sectionsubjected to frequency division from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 65, forexample.

The above has described that data symbols are allocated preferentiallyfrom a position having a smaller frequency index, yet data symbols arepreferentially arranged from a position having a smaller time index.This point is to be described.

In data symbol group #FD1 (6501), data symbols are preferentiallyarranged from a position having a smaller time index. A rule that ifdata symbols are arranged at all the occupied carriers at a certaintime, data symbols are arranged at carriers at a time subsequent to thecertain time is adopted.

For example, in data symbol group #FD1 (6501), as illustrated in FIG.65, a data symbol is arranged at carrier 1 at time $1, and thereafterdata symbols are arranged at carrier 2 at time $1, carrier 3 at time $1,. . . , carrier 14 at time $1, and carrier 15 at time $1. Then, movingonto time $2, data symbols are arranged at carrier 1 at time $2, carrier2 at time $2, carrier 3 at time $2, . . . , carrier 14 at time $2, andcarrier 15 at time $2.

Thereafter, data symbols are arranged also at time $3 in the samemanner, and data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 in the samemanner.

In data symbol group #FD2 (6502), as illustrated in FIG. 65, a datasymbol is arranged at carrier 16 at time $1, and thereafter data symbolsare arranged at carrier 17 at time $1, carrier 18 at time $1, . . . ,carrier 29 at time $1, and carrier 30 at time $1. Then, moving onto time$2, data symbols are arranged at carrier 17 at time $2, carrier 18 attime $2, carrier 19 at time $2, . . . , carrier 29 at time $2, andcarrier 30 at time $2. Thereafter, data symbols are arranged also attime $3 in the same manner, and data symbols are arranged up to time$6000 in the same manner.

A data symbol is arranged at carrier 16 at time $6001, and thereafterdata symbols are arranged at carrier 17 at time $6001, carrier 18 attime $6001, . . . , carrier 28 at time $6001, and carrier 29 at time$6001. Then, moving onto time $6002, data symbols are arranged atcarrier 17 at time $6002, carrier 18 at time $6002, carrier 19 at time$6002, . . . , carrier 28 at time $6002, and carrier 29 at time $6002.Thereafter, data symbols are arranged also at time $6003 in the samemanner, and data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 in the samemanner.

In data symbol group #FD3 (6503), as illustrated in FIG. 65, a datasymbol is arranged at carrier 31 at time $1, and thereafter, datasymbols are arranged at carrier 32 at time $1, carrier 33 at time $1, .. . , carrier 44 at time $1, and carrier 45 at time $1. Moving onto time$2, data symbols are arranged at carrier 31 at time $2, carrier 32 attime $2, carrier 33 at time $2, . . . , carrier 44 at time $2, andcarrier 45 at time $2. Thereafter, data symbols are arranged also attime $3 in the same manner, and data symbols are arranged up to time$6000 in the same manner.

A data symbol is arranged at carrier 30 at time $6001, and thereafter,data symbols are arranged at carrier 31 at time $6001, carrier 32 attime $6001, . . . , carrier 44 at time $6001, and carrier 45 at time$6001. Then, moving onto time $6002, data symbols are arranged atcarrier 31 at time $6002, carrier 32 at time $6002, carrier 33 at time$6002, . . . , carrier 44 at time $6002, and carrier 45 at time $6002.Data symbols are arranged also at time $6003 in the same manner, anddata symbols are arranged up to time $7000 in the same manner.

Then, a data symbol is arranged at carrier 30 at time $7001, andthereafter data symbols are arranged at carrier 31 at time $7001,carrier 32 at time $7001, . . . , carrier 43 at time $7001, and carrier44 at time $7001. Then, moving onto time $7002, data symbols arearranged at carrier 30 at time $7002, carrier 31 at time $7002, carrier32 at time $7002, . . . , carrier 43 at time $6002, and carrier 44 attime $6002. Thereafter, data symbols are arranged also at time $7003 inthe same manner, and then data symbols are arranged up to time $10000 inthe same manner.

Data symbols are arranged also for data symbol group #FD4 (6504) in thesame manner.

Note that the arrangement described here means “a method of arranginggenerated data symbols in order”, or “a method of rearranging generateddata symbols, and arranging the rearranged data symbols in order”.

Arranging data symbols in such a manner gives the receiving apparatus anadvantage that a less storage capacity is used for storing data symbols.If data symbols are arranged in the frequency direction, it may bedifficult to start the next processing until data symbols at time $10000are received.

Data symbol groups #TFDX (3401 to 3408) in FIG. 65 operate in the sameway as those in FIG. 64, and thus description thereof is omitted.

As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methodsfor a frame subjected to frequency division multiplexing and a framesubjected to time-frequency division multiplexing, whereby a receivingapparatus can readily sort out data symbols, and demodulate and decodedata. Furthermore, an advantageous effect of preventing fall of a datatransmission rate due to dummy symbols can be achieved.

Note that a frame configuration in which “preambles”, “symbols subjectedto frequency division”, and “symbols subjected to time-frequencydivision” are arranged in the order along the time axis is describedbased on the example in FIG. 65, yet the present disclosure is notlimited to this, and for example, a frame configuration in which“preambles”, “symbols subjected to time-frequency division, and “symbolssubjected to frequency division” are arranged in the order may beadopted.

The frame configuration may also include symbols other than the symbolsillustrated in FIG. 65. As an example, a method of including in theframe configuration “preambles”, “symbols subjected to frequencydivision, “symbols subjected to time-frequency division”, and “symbolssubjected to time division” is described.

For example, in FIG. 65, “preambles” may be inserted between “symbolssubjected to frequency division” and “symbols subjected totime-frequency division”, and other symbols may be inserted between“symbols subjected to frequency division” and “symbols subjected totime-frequency division”.

FIG. 66 illustrates an example of a frame configuration in which thehorizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency, and the same reference numerals are assigned to elementsoperating in the same way as those in FIG. 2.

Symbols 6601 subjected to time division are transmitted in a sectionfrom time t1 to t2. Note that an example of a configuration of symbolssubjected to time division is as illustrated in FIG. 63, and symbols6601 subjected to time division include, for example, data symbol group#TD1 (6301), data symbol group #TD2 (6302), data symbol group #TD3(6303), data symbol group #TD4 (6304), data symbol group #TD5 (6305),and dummy symbols 6306.

In a section from time t2 to time t3, symbols 6602 subjected tofrequency division are transmitted. Note that an example of aconfiguration of symbols subjected to frequency division is asillustrated in FIG. 65, and symbols 6602 subjected to frequency divisioninclude data symbol group #FD1 (6501), data symbol group #FD2 (6502),data symbol group #FD3 (6503), data symbol group #FD4 (6504), and dummysymbols (6505), for example.

In a section from time t3 to time t4, symbols 6603 subjected totime-frequency division are transmitted. Note that an example of aconfiguration of symbols subjected to time-frequency division is asillustrated in FIGS. 63 and 65, and symbols 6703 subjected totime-frequency division include, for example, data symbol group #TFD1(3401), data symbol group #TFD2 (3402), data symbol group #TFD3 (3403),data symbol group #TFD4 (3404), data symbol group #TFD5 (3405), datasymbol group #TFD6 (3406), data symbol group #TFD7 (3407), and datasymbol group #TFD8 (3408).

At this time, a method of inserting dummy symbols to symbols 6601subjected to time division is the same as the method described above, amethod of inserting dummy symbols to symbols 6602 subjected to frequencydivision is also the same as the method described above, and a method ofinserting dummy symbols to symbols 6603 subjected to time-frequencydivision is also the same as the method described above.

As described above, dummy symbols are inserted using different methodsfor a frame subjected to time division, a frame subjected to frequencydivision multiplexing, and a frame subjected to time-frequency divisionmultiplexing, whereby a receiving apparatus can readily sort out datasymbols, and demodulate and decode data. Furthermore, an advantageouseffect of preventing fall of a data transmission rate due to dummysymbols can be achieved.

Note that a frame configuration in which “preambles”, “symbols subjectedto time division”, “symbols subjected to frequency division”, and“symbols subjected to time-frequency division” are arranged in the orderalong the time axis is described based on the example in FIG. 66, yetthe present disclosure is not limited to this, and for example, “symbolssubjected to time division”, “symbols subjected to frequency division”,and “symbols subjected to time-frequency division” may be transmitted inany (temporal) order subsequently to “preambles”. The frameconfiguration may also include symbols other than the symbolsillustrated in FIG. 66.

For example, in FIG. 66, “preambles” may be inserted between “symbolssubjected to time division” and “symbols subjected to frequencydivision”, and other symbols may be inserted between “symbols subjectedto time division” and “symbols subjected to frequency division”. Inaddition, “preambles” may be inserted between “symbols subjected tofrequency division” and “symbols subjected to time-frequency division”,and other symbols may be inserted between “symbols subjected tofrequency division” and “symbols subjected to time-frequency division”.

Note that the present disclosure can be achieved even by partiallycombining and executing the present disclosure.

Exemplary Embodiment B

(Frame Configuration)

An example of a transmission frame configuration in the presentexemplary embodiment is described with reference to FIG. 67. In FIG. 67,the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency. The same reference numerals are assigned to elementsoperating in the same way as those in FIG. 2. FIG. 67 illustrates anexample in which ten multiplex frames from multiplex frame #MF1 (6701)to multiplex frame #MF10 (6710) are included in a transmission frame.The multiplex frames occupy areas that do not overlap each other withina transmission frame. In the example in FIG. 67, multiplex frame #MF1(6701) occupies an area from carrier 1 to carrier 2000 from time $1 totime $60, multiplex frame #MF2 (6702) occupies an area from carrier 1 tocarrier 2000 from time $61 to time $100, multiplex frames #MF3 (6703)occupies an area from carrier 1 to carrier 2000 from time $101 to time$160, multiplex frame #MF4 (6704) occupies an area from carrier 1 tocarrier 600 from time $161 to time $360, multiplex frame #MF5 (6705)occupies an area from carrier 601 to carrier 1000 from time $161 to time$260, multiplex frame #MF6 (6706) occupies an area from carrier 601 tocarrier 1000 from time $261 to time $360, multiplex frame #MF7 (6707)occupies an area from carrier 1001 to carrier 1600 from time $161 totime $360, multiplex frame #MF8 (6708) occupies an area from carrier1601 to carrier 2000 from time $161 to time $400, multiplex frame #MF9(6709) occupies an area from carrier 1 to carrier 800 from time $361 totime $400, and multiplex frame #MF10 (6710) occupies an area fromcarrier 801 to carrier 1600 from time $361 to time $400.

(Designation of Multiplex Frame)

A configuration of a multiplex frame is designated as follows, forexample.

An example of a designator which indicates the configuration of amultiplex frame is illustrated in FIG. 68. The number of multiplexframes is indicated by numMuxFrames. First, numMuxFrames is designated.Next, information on a multiplex frame is designated repeatedly for thecount indicated by numMuxFrames. Information on each multiplex frameincludes information indicating an area of the multiplex frame, andmuxFrameType which is information indicating a type of the multiplexframe. The information indicating an area of the multiplex frame mayinclude, for example, startTime which is a time when the multiplex framestarts, startCarrier which is a carrier at which the multiplex framestarts, endTime which is a time at which the multiplex frame ends, andendCarrier which is a carrier at which the multiplex frame ends. Theinformation on each multiplex frame may include etc which is informationon the multiplex frame other than the above.

(Type of Multiplex Frame)

A field labeled with muxFrameType which indicates the type of amultiplex frame is a field for designating the configuration or usage ofthe multiplex frame, such as time division multiplexing (TDM) andfrequency division multiplexing (FDM), for example. The values of thefield labeled with muxFrameType indicating the type of a multiplex framemay include extra values in order that future extension is allowed and aconfiguration and usage other than TDM or FDM can also be designated.

(Designation of Last Carrier)

A symbol which is not used for data transmission such as a pilot symbolis multiplexed into a transmission frame, and thus the number ofcarriers which can be used for transmitting data symbols may varydepending on a time. Although FIG. 68 illustrates an example in whichcarrier 2000 is at the last end, yet for example, even if carrier 2000is at the last end at time $1, carrier 1998 is at the last end at time$2, and carrier 2003 is at the last end at time $3. Accordingly, aproblem arises when an area of a multiplex frame that includes a carriernear the last end is designated.

The last end carrier at a time when the number of carriers which can beused to transmit data symbols is the fewest within a multiplex framewhich includes a carrier near the last end may be designated in a fieldlabeled with endCarrier of the multiplex frame. In this case, arectangular multiplex frame may be configured. However, in this case,there are unused carriers at a time when there are many carriers whichcan be used to transmit data symbols. An unused carrier that is not usedto transmit a data symbol is used to transmit a dummy symbol, forexample.

The last end at a time when the number of carriers which can be used totransmit data symbols is the greatest within a multiplex frame whichincludes a carrier near the last end may be designated in a fieldlabeled with endCarrier of the multiplex frame. In this case, the numberof carriers used to transmit data symbols varies for each time,according to a carrier at the last end which can be used to transmit adata symbol.

A special value that indicates a position of a carrier at the last endwhich can be used to transmit a data symbol is predetermined for eachtime, and the special value may be set in a field labeled withendCarrier which indicates a carrier at which a multiplex frame ends.The special value may be the maximum value that can be designated in thefield labeled with endCarrier. By setting such a special value in thefield labeled with endCarrier which indicates a carrier at which amultiplex frame ends, it is not necessary to identify in advance acarrier at the last end at a time when the number of carriers which canbe used to transmit data symbols is the greatest within the multiplexframe.

Examples of values designated in the configuration of the multiplexframe illustrated in FIG. 68 are shown below, based on the exampleillustrated in FIG. 67. The number of multiplex frames is 10, and thusnumMuxFrames is 10. Here, with regard to i-th multiplex frame #MFi, atime at which the frame starts is expressed by startTime [i], a carrierat which the frame starts is expressed by startCarrier [i], a time atwhich the frame ends is expressed by endTime [i], and a type of amultiplex frame is expressed by muxFrameType [i]. In the example ofmultiplex frame #MF1, startTime [1] is time $1, startCarrier [1] iscarrier 1, endTime [1] is time $60, and endCarrier [1] is carrier 2000.In the example of multiplex frame #MF5, startTime [5] is time $161,startCarrier [5] is carrier 601, endTime [5] is time $260, andendCarrier [5] is carrier 1000.

FIG. 69 illustrates an example in which a data symbol group ismultiplexed into multiplex frame #MF1 (6701) in FIG. 67. The type ofmultiplex frame #MF1 (6701) is a frame subjected to time divisionmultiplexing (TDM). TDM is designated in muxFrameType [1]. In theexample in FIG. 69, three data symbol groups from data symbol group #DS1(6901) to data symbol group #DS3 (6903) are subjected to TDM. Datasymbol group #DS1 (6901), data symbol group #DS2 (6902), data symbolgroup #DS3 (6903) are sequentially multiplexed into multiplex frame #MF1(6701), and if there are remaining symbols, a dummy symbol group (6904)is inserted.

Information on the arrangement of a data symbol group is designated by,for example, the number of a multiplex frame into which the data symbolgroup is multiplexed, and an area within the multiplex frame. An areawithin a multiplex frame is, for example, expressed by a start positionand an end position of an area where a data symbol group is multiplexed.When the data symbol groups are multiplexed from the leading end of amultiplex frame without any space, the start positions of areas wherethe data symbol groups are multiplexed are known, and thus only the endpositions of the areas where the data symbol groups are multiplexed maybe designated. The start and end positions of areas where data symbolgroups are multiplexed may be designated using time positions andcarrier positions within a transmission-frame, or may be designatedusing relative time positions and relative carrier positions in amultiplex frame.

An example in which three data symbol groups are multiplexed intomultiplex frame #MF1 (6701) has been described, yet the number of datasymbol groups to be multiplexed into a multiplex frame is not limited tothree, and instead no data symbol groups may be multiplexed.

As described above, by efficiently multiplexing a plurality of datasymbol groups into one multiplex frame, the number of symbols in a dummysymbol group can be decreased, and transmission efficiency can beimproved.

FIG. 70 illustrates an example in which data symbol groups aremultiplexed into multiplex frame #MF3 (6703) in FIG. 67. The type ofmultiplex frame #MF3 (6703) is a frame subjected to frequency divisionmultiplexing (FDM). FDM is designated in muxFrameType [3].

In the example in FIG. 70, three data symbol groups, namely data symbolgroup #DS6 (7001) to data symbol group #DS8 (7003) are subjected tofrequency division multiplexing. Data symbol group #DS6 (7001), datasymbol group #DS7 (7002), and data symbol group #DS8 (7003) aresequentially multiplexed into multiplex frame #MF3 (6703), and if thereare remaining symbols, a dummy symbol group (7004) is inserted.

Information on the arrangement of a data symbol group is designated by,for example, the number of a multiplex frame into which the data symbolgroup is multiplexed, and an area within the multiplex frame. An areawithin a multiplex frame is, for example, expressed by a start positionand an end position of an area where a data symbol group is multiplexed.When data symbol groups are multiplexed from the leading end of amultiplex frame without any space, the start positions of areas wherethe data symbol groups are multiplexed are known, and thus only the endpositions of the areas where the data symbol groups are multiplexed maybe designated. The start and end positions of areas where data symbolgroups are multiplexed may be designated using time positions andcarrier positions within a transmission frame, or may be designatedusing relative time positions and relative carrier positions in amultiplex frame.

An example in which three data symbol groups are multiplexed intomultiplex frame #MF3 (6703) has been described, yet the number of datasymbol groups to be multiplexed into a multiplex frame is not limited tothree, and instead no data symbol groups may be multiplexed.

As described above, by efficiently multiplexing a plurality of datasymbol groups into one multiplex frame, the number of symbols in a dummysymbol group can be decreased, and transmission efficiency can beimproved.

(Designation of a Data Symbol Group)

Information on a data symbol group is designated as follows, forexample. FIG. 71 illustrates an example of a designator with regard to adata symbol group. The number of data symbol groups is indicated bynumDataSymbolGroups. First, numDataSymbolGroups is designated. Next,information on a data symbol group is repeatedly designated for a countindicated by numDataSymbolGroups. Information on each data symbol groupincludes muxFrameIndex indicating the number of a multiplex frame inwhich a data symbol group is arranged and information indicating an areawhere a data symbol group is arranged. Information indicating an area inwhich a data symbol group is arranged includes, for example,endTimeOffset indicating a time at which an area of a data symbol groupends, and endCarrierOffset indicating a carrier in which the area of thedata symbol group ends. Information indicating an area in which a datasymbol group is arranged may further include, for example,startTimeOffset indicating a time at which an area of a data symbolgroup starts, and startCarrierOffset indicating a carrier in which thearea of the data symbol group starts. Further, startTimeOffsetindicating a time at which an area of a data symbol group starts,startCarrierOffset indicating a carrier at which the area of the datasymbol group starts, endTimeOffset indicating a time at which the areaof the data symbol group ends, and endCarrierOffset indicating a carrierat which the area of the data symbol group starts may be indicated usingtime positions and carrier positions within a transmission frame, or maybe indicated using relative time positions and relative carrierpositions in a multiplex frame. Information on a data symbol group mayinclude etc. indicating information on data symbols other than theabove.

(Hierarchical Structure)

In the present exemplary embodiment, a transmission frame can beflexibly configured by forming a configuration of a multiplex frame andarrangement of data symbol groups into a hierarchy. Furthermore,designation with regard to a configuration of a multiplex frame, anddesignation with regard to a data symbol group are simplified, thusreducing the amount of information necessary for such designations andimproving transmission efficiency.

Furthermore, the number of dummy symbols can be reduced and transmissionefficiency can be improved, by multiplexing a plurality of data symbolgroups into a multiplex frame.

(Supplementary Note 1)

The broadcast (or communication) system according to the presentdisclosure is described according to the above-described exemplaryembodiments. However, the present disclosure is not limited to theabove-described exemplary embodiments.

As a matter of course, the present disclosure may be carried out bycombining a plurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contentsdescribed herein.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment and the other contents are onlyexamples. For example, while a “modulating method, an error correctioncoding method (an error correction code, a code length, a coding rateand the like to be used), control information and the like” areexemplified, it is possible to carry out the present disclosure with thesame configuration even when other types of a “modulating method, anerror correction coding method (an error correction code, a code length,a coding rate and the like to be used), control information and thelike” are applied.

As for a modulating method, even when a modulating method other than themodulating methods described herein is used, it is possible to carry outthe exemplary embodiments and the other contents described herein. Forexample, APSK (Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) (such as 16APSK, 64APSK,128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK and 4096APSK), PAM (Pulse AmplitudeModulation) (such as 4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM, 64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM, 1024PAMand 4096PAM), PSK (Phase Shift Keying) (such as BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16PSK,64PSK, 128PSK, 256PSK, 1024PSK and 4096PSK), and QAM (QuadratureAmplitude Modulation) (such as 4QAM, 8QAM, 16QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM,1024QAM and 4096QAM) may be applied, or in each modulating method,uniform mapping or non-uniform mapping may be performed (any mapping maybe performed).

Moreover, a method for arranging 16 signal points, 64 signal points orthe like on an I-Q plane (a modulating method having 16 signal points,64 signal points or the like) is not limited to a signal point arrangingmethod of the modulating methods described herein. Hence, a function ofoutputting an in-phase component and a quadrature component based on aplurality of bits is a function in a mapper.

Moreover, herein, when there is a complex plane, a phase unit such as anargument is a “radian.”

When the complex plane is used, display in a polar form can be made asdisplay by polar coordinates of a complex number. When point (a, b) onthe complex plane is associated with complex number z=a+jb (a and b areboth actual numbers, and j is a unit of an imaginary number), and whenthis point is expressed by [r, θ] in polar coordinates, a=r×cos θ andb=r×sin θ[Equation 61]r=√{square root over (a ² +b ²)}  (61)

hold, r is an absolute value of z (r=|z|), and θ is an argument. Then,z=a+jb is expressed by r×e^(jθ).

The present disclosure described herein is applicable to a multi-carriertransmitting method such as the OFDM method, and is also applicable to asingle carrier transmitting method. (For example, in a case of amulti-carrier method, symbols are arranged in a frequency axis, but in acase of a single carrier, symbols are arranged only in a timedirection.) Moreover, a spread spectrum communication method is alsoapplicable to baseband signals by using spreading codes.

Different modulating methods may be used for pieces of data s0, s1, s2and s3 in the above-described exemplary embodiments, respectively.

Herein, a receiving apparatus of a terminal and an antenna may beconfigured separately. For example, the receiving apparatus includes aninterface which receives through a cable an input of a signal receivedat the antenna or a signal obtained by performing frequency conversionon a signal received at the antenna, and the receiving apparatusperforms subsequent processing. Moreover, data and information obtainedby the receiving apparatus is subsequently converted into a video or asound, and a display (monitor) displays the video or a speaker outputsthe sound. Further, the data and information obtained by the receivingapparatus may be subjected to signal processing related to a video or asound (signal processing may not be performed), and may be output froman RCA terminal (a video terminal or an audio terminal), a USB(Universal Serial Bus), a USB 2, a USB 3, an HDMI (registered trademark)(High-Definition Multimedia Interface), an HDMI (registered trademark)2, a digital terminal or the like of the receiving apparatus. Moreover,the data and information obtained by the receiving apparatus ismodulated by using a wireless communication method (Wi-Fi (registeredtrademark) (IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ad and the like), WiGiG, Bluetooth (registeredtrademark) and the like) or a wired communication method (opticalcommunication, power line communication and the like), and these piecesof information may be transmitted to other apparatuses. In this case, aterminal includes a transmitting apparatus for transmitting information.(In this case, the terminal may transmit data including the data andinformation obtained by the receiving apparatus, or may generatemodified data from the data and information obtained by the receivingapparatus and transmit the modified data).

Herein, it can be considered that a communication or broadcastapparatuses such as a broadcast station, a base station, an accesspoint, a terminal and a mobile phone includes the transmittingapparatus. In this case, it can be considered that a communicationapparatus such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personalcomputer, a mobile phone, an access point and a base station includesthe receiving apparatus. Moreover, it can also be considered that eachof the transmitting apparatus and the receiving apparatus according tothe present disclosure is an apparatus having communication functionsand has a form connectable via any interface to an apparatus forexecuting an application such as a television, a radio, a personalcomputer and a mobile phone.

Moreover, in the present exemplary embodiment, symbols other than datasymbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words,postambles, reference symbols and the like), and control informationsymbols may be arranged in frames in any way. Then, these symbols arenamed a pilot symbol and a control information symbol here, but may benamed in any way, and a function itself is important.

As a result, for example, a symbol is named a preamble herein, but thename of the symbol is not limited to this name, and the symbol may benamed another name such as a control information symbol and a controlchannel. This symbol is a symbol for transmitting control informationsuch as information of a transmitting method, examples of which includea transmitting method, a modulating method, a coding rate of an errorcorrection code, a code length of an error correction code, a frameconfiguring method and a Fourier transform method (size).

Moreover, the pilot symbol only needs to be a known symbol modulated byusing PSK modulation in a transmitting apparatus and a receivingapparatus or the receiving apparatus may be able to learn a symboltransmitted by the transmitting apparatus by establishingsynchronization. The receiving apparatus performs frequencysynchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation (of eachmodulated signal) (estimation of CSI (Channel State Information)),signal detection and the like by using this symbol.

Moreover, the control information symbol is a symbol for transmittinginformation that is used for realizing communication other than datacommunication (such as application communication) and that needs to betransmitted to a communicating party, examples of the informationincluding a modulating method used for communication, an errorcorrection coding method, a coding rate of the error correction codingmethod and setting information in an upper layer.

In the frame configurations herein, another symbol (for example, a pilotsymbol and a null symbol (an in-phase component of the symbol is 0(zero, and a quadrature component is 0 (zero)))) may be inserted to thefirst preamble.

Similarly, a symbol such as a pilot symbol and a null symbol (anin-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero, and a quadrature componentis 0 (zero))) may be inserted to the second preamble. Moreover, apreamble is configured with the first preamble and the second preamble.However, the preamble configuration is not limited to thisconfiguration. The preamble may be configured with the first preamble(first preamble group) alone or may be configured with two or morepreambles (preamble groups). Note that in regard to the preambleconfiguration, the same also applies to frame configurations of otherexemplary embodiments.

Moreover, the data symbol group is indicated in the frame configurationsherein. However, another symbol, examples of which include a pilotsymbol, a null symbol (an in-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero,and a quadrature component is 0 (zero))), and a control informationsymbol, may be inserted. Note that in this regard, the same also appliesto frame configurations of other exemplary embodiments. Then, anothersymbol, examples of which include a pilot symbol, a null symbol (anin-phase component of the symbol is 0 (zero, and a quadrature componentis 0 (zero))), a control information symbol and a data symbol, may beinserted in a pilot symbol.

Moreover, some of the frame configurations of modulated signals to betransmitted by the transmitting apparatus are described herein. In thiscase, the above describes the point that “time division (temporaldivision) is performed.” However, when two data symbol groups areconnected, there is a portion subjected to frequency division at a seamportion. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

FIG. 39 illustrates symbol 3901 of data symbol group #1 and symbol 3902of data symbol group #2. As illustrated at time t0 in FIG. 39, thesymbol of data symbol group #1 ends with carrier 4. In this case, thesymbol of data symbol group #2 is arranged from carrier 5 at time to.Then, only a portion at time t0 is exceptionally subjected to frequencydivision. However, there is only the symbol of data symbol group #1before time t0, and there is only the symbol of data symbol group #2after time t0. At this point, time division (temporal division) isperformed.

FIG. 40 illustrates another example. Note that the same referencenumerals as those in FIG. 39 are assigned. As illustrated at time t0 inFIG. 40, the symbol of data symbol group #1 ends with carrier 4. Then,as illustrated at time t1, the symbol of data symbol group #1 ends withcarrier 5. Then, the symbol of data symbol group #2 is arranged fromcarrier 5 at time to, and the symbol of data symbol group #2 is arrangedfrom carrier 6 at time t1. Then, portions at time t0 and time t1 areexceptionally subjected to frequency division. However, there is onlythe symbol of data symbol group #1 before time t0, and there is only thesymbol of data symbol #2 after time t1. At this point, time division(temporal division) is performed.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, there is a case where, except for theexceptional portions, there are time at which there is no data symbolother than the symbol of data symbol group #1, but there may be a pilotsymbol or the like and time at which there is no data symbol other thanthe symbol of data symbol group #2, but there may be a pilot symbol orthe like. This case will be referred to as “time division (temporaldivision) is performed.” Hence, an exceptional time existing method isnot limited to FIGS. 39 and 40.

Note that the present disclosure is not limited to each exemplaryembodiment, and can be carried out with various modifications. Forexample, the case where the present disclosure is performed as acommunication apparatus is described in each exemplary embodiment.However, the present disclosure is not limited to this case, and thiscommunication method can also be used as software.

Transmission antennas of transmission stations and base stations,reception antennas of terminals and one antenna described in thedrawings may be configured with a plurality of antennas.

Note that a program for executing the above-described communicationmethod may be stored in a ROM (Read Only Memory) in advance to cause aCPU (Central Processing Unit) to operate this program.

Moreover, the program for executing the communication method may bestored in a computer-readable storage medium to record the programstored in the recording medium in a RAM (Random Access Memory) of acomputer, and to cause the computer to operate according to thisprogram.

Then, each configuration of each of the above-described exemplaryembodiments and the like may be realized as an LSI (Large ScaleIntegration) which is typically an integrated circuit having an inputterminal and an output terminal. These integrated circuits may be formedas one chip separately, or may be formed as one chip so as to includethe entire configuration or part of the configuration of each exemplaryembodiment. The LSI is described here, but the integrated circuit mayalso be referred to as an IC (Integrated Circuit), a system LSI, a superLSI and an ultra LSI depending on a degree of integration. Moreover, acircuit integration technique is not limited to the LSI, and may berealized by a dedicated circuit or a general purpose processor. Aftermanufacturing of the LSI, a programmable FPGA (Field Programmable GateArray) or a reconfigurable processor which is reconfigurable inconnection or settings of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.

Further, when development of a semiconductor technology or anotherderived technology provides a circuit integration technology whichreplaces the LSI, as a matter of course, functional blocks may beintegrated by using this technology. There may be biotechnologyadaptation or the like as a possibility.

The present disclosure is widely applicable to a wireless system whichtransmits different modulated signals from a plurality of antennas,respectively. Moreover, the present disclosure is also applicable to acase where MIMO transmission is performed in a wired communicationsystem having a plurality of transmission portions (for example, a PLC(Power Line Communication) system, an optical communication system, anda DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) system).

Note that the first exemplary embodiment is described by using basebandsignals s1(t), s1(i), s2(t), and s2(i). In this case, data to betransmitted with s1(t) and s1(i) and data to be transmitted with s2(t)and s2(i) may be the same.

Moreover, s1(t)=s2(t), and s1(i)=s2(i) may hold. In this case, amodulated signal of one stream is transmitted from a plurality ofantennas.

Exemplary Embodiment C

The present exemplary embodiment describes allocation of data symbolgroups to terminals conducted when a base station or an access point(AP), for instance, transmits a modulated signal indicated by a frameconfiguration based on the time and frequency axes described in thisspecification such as those illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 2, 3, 4,5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48,29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, and 65 (but, the frame configuration is notlimited to these).

FIG. 72 illustrates an example of a relation between a base station(access point) and terminals. Base station (AP) 7200-00 communicateswith terminal #1 (7200-01), terminal #2 (7200-02), . . . , and terminal#n (7200-n) (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2). Notethat FIG. 72 illustrates an example of a state in which a base station(AP) communicates with terminals, but the state in which the basestation (AP) communicates with terminals is not limited to the state inFIG. 72, and the base station (AP) is assumed to communicate with atleast one terminal.

FIG. 73 illustrates an example of communication between the base stationand terminals in the present exemplary embodiment.

<1> First, the terminals each transmit a request for transmitting a datasymbol group to a base station (AP).

For example, when the base station (AP) and terminals are in a state asillustrated in FIG. 72, terminal #1 (7200-01) transmits a request fortransmitting a data symbol group to base station (AP) 7200-00.Similarly, terminal #2 (7200-02) transmits a request for transmitting adata symbol group to base station (AP) 7200-00. Similarly, terminal #n(7200-n) transmits a request for transmitting a data symbol group tobase station (AP) 7200-00.

<2> The base station receives, from each terminal, a modulated signalwhich includes a request for a data symbol group. The base stationobtains information on the request for a data symbol group from eachterminal, and determines allocation of data symbol groups included in aframe of a modulated signal which the base station transmits to theterminals.

For example, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits a modulated signalindicated by the frame configuration in FIG. 54. Base station (AP)7200-00 has received requests for transmitting data, from terminal #1(7200-01), terminal #2 (7200-02), terminal #3 (7200-03), terminal #4(7200-04), terminal #5 (7200-05), terminal #6 (7200-06), terminal #7(7200-07), and terminal #8 (7200-08).

Then, base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #1 (3401) in FIG.54 as a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #8(7200-08). Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal#8 (7200-08)) to terminal #8 (7200-08), using data symbol group #1(3401) in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #2 (3402) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #7 (7200-07).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #7(7200-07)) to terminal #7 (7200-07), using data symbol group #2 (3402)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #3 (3403) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #6 (7200-06).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #6(7200-06)) to terminal #6 (7200-06), using data symbol group #3 (3403)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #4 (3404) in FIG. 54,as a data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #5 (7200-05).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #5(7200-05)) to terminal #5 (7200-05), using data symbol group #4 (3404)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #5 (3405) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #4 (7200-04).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #4(7200-04)) to terminal #4 (7200-04), using data symbol group #5 (3405)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #6 (3406) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #3 (7200-03).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #3(7200-03)) to terminal #3 (7200-03), using data symbol group #6 (3406)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #7 (3407) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #2 (7200-02).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #2(7200-02)) to terminal #2 (7200-02), using data symbol group #7 (3407)in FIG. 54.

Base station (AP) 7200-00 sets data symbol group #8 (3408) in FIG. 54 asa data symbol group for transmitting data to terminal #1 (7200-01).Thus, base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits data (for terminal #1(7200-01)) to terminal #1 (7200-01), using data symbol group #8 (3408)in FIG. 54.

Note that a method of allocating data symbol groups to the terminals isnot limited to the above method, and data symbol group #1 (3401) may beallocated to a terminal other than terminal #8 (7200-08), for example.In addition, in the above description, the frame configuration of amodulated signal which base station (AP) 7200-00 transmits is theconfiguration in FIG. 54, but is not limited to this. The frameconfiguration of a modulated signal which base station (AP) 7200-00transmits may be the configuration illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2,3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48,29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, or 65 (or another frame configuration otherthan these).

A frame configuring method is conceivable in which information on arelation between a data symbol group and a terminal (such as, forexample, information indicating that “data symbol group #8 (3408)includes data for terminal #1 (7200-01)” is included in first preamble3601 and/or second preamble 3602 in FIG. 54.

Note that a method of transmitting data symbol groups may be any of theSISO method, the MISO method, and the MIMO method, for instance. Notethat details are described using examples in this specification. TheSISO method is a method with which, for example, one modulated signal istransmitted or one modulated signal is transmitted using a plurality ofantennas. Note that modulated signals transmitted from the antennas maybe the same or different. The MISO method is, for example, a method inwhich a space time block code or a time-frequency block code is used.The MIMO method is a method for transmitting, for example, a pluralityof modulated signals using a plurality of antennas, for example.

The data symbol groups may be used to transmit any type of informationincluding video information, audio information, and text information, ormay be used to transmit data for control. In other words, datatransmitted using data symbol groups may be any type of data.

<3> The terminals each receive a modulated signal transmitted by thebase station, extract a data symbol group to be needed, demodulate thedata symbol group, and obtain data.

For example, when data symbol groups are allocated as described above,terminal #1 (7200-01) receives a modulated signal transmitted by basestation (AP) 7200-00, obtains “information on a relation between a datasymbol group and a terminal” included in first preamble 3601 and/orsecond preamble 3602, extracts a data symbol group which includes datafor terminal #1 (7200-01), namely data symbol group #8 (3408), anddemodulates (and performs error correction decoding on) data symbolgroup #8 (3408), thus obtaining data.

FIG. 74 illustrates an example of a configuration of the base station(AP) in the present exemplary embodiment.

Receiver 7400-07 receives an input of received signal 7400-06 which isreceived by antenna 7400-05. Receiver 7400-07 performs processes such asfrequency conversion, signal processing for, for example, OFDM,demapping (demodulation), and error correction decoding, and outputsreceived data 7400-08.

Transmitter 7400-02 receives inputs of, for example, transmission data7400-01 which includes control information to be transmitted in, forinstance, a preamble and received data 7400-08. Transmitter 7400-02performs, on transmit data 7400-01, processes such as error correctioncoding, mapping using a modulation method which has been set, signalprocessing for, for example, OFDM, frequency conversion, andamplification, and generates and outputs modulated signal 7400-03,modulated signal 7400-03 is outputted as a radio wave from antenna7400-04, and one or more terminals receive modulated signal 7400-03.

Note that transmitter 7400-02 receives an input of received data7400-08. At this time, received data 7400-08 includes information onrequests for transmitting data from terminals. Accordingly, based on theinformation on requests for transmitting data from terminals,transmitter 7400-02 generates a modulated signal for the frameconfiguration in FIG. 54, as described above. At this time, transmitter7400-02 allocates, to terminals, data symbol groups 3401, 3402, 3403,3404, 3405, 3406, 3407, and 3408 as described above, based oninformation on requests for transmitting data from terminals. Inaddition, transmitter 7400-02 generates the first preamble and/or thesecond preamble in FIG. 54 which include(s) data symbol groups involvedin allocation to terminals based on information on requests fortransmitting data from terminals, and information related to terminals,such as information indicating, for example, “data symbol group #8(3408) includes data for terminal #1 (7200-01)”.

Note that examples of a configuration of a transmitting apparatusincluded in the base station (AP) are as illustrated in FIGS. 1, 58, and76, and the configuration in FIG. 76 is later described.

In FIG. 74, the base station (AP) includes single antenna 7400-04 fortransmission, but the present disclosure is not limited to a singleantenna, and the base station (AP) may include a plurality of antennasfor transmission. At this time, transmitter 7400-02 transmits aplurality of modulated signals using the plurality of transmissionantennas, and thus generates a plurality of modulated signals.

Similarly, in FIG. 74, the base station (AP) includes single antenna7400-05 for reception, but the present disclosure is not limited to asingle antenna, and the base station (AP) may include a plurality ofantennas for reception. At this time, a plurality of modulated signalsare received using the plurality of antennas, and receiver 7400-07performs signal processing on the plurality of modulated signals, thusobtaining received data.

FIG. 75 illustrates an example of a configuration of a terminal in thepresent exemplary embodiment.

Receiver 7500-07 receives an input of received signal 7500-06 receivedvia antenna 7500-05, performs processes such as frequency conversion,signal processing for, for example, OFDM, demapping (demodulation), anderror correction decoding, and outputs received data 7500-08.

Transmitter 7500-02 receives inputs of, for example, transmission data7500-01 which includes control information transmitted in a preamble,for instance, and received data 7500-08. Transmitter 7500-02 performs,on transmission data 7500-01, error correction coding, mapping using amodulation method which has been set, signal processing for, forexample, OFDM, frequency conversion, and amplification, and generatesand outputs modulated signal 7500-03. Modulated signal 7500-03 is outputas a radio wave from antenna 7500-04, and the base station (AP) receivesmodulated signal 7500-03.

Note that transmitter 7500-02 receives an input of received data7500-08. At this time, received data 7500-08 may include controlinformation from the base station (AP). At this time, transmitter7500-02 may set, based on control information from the base station(AP), a transmitting method, a frame configuration, a modulation method,and an error correction coding method, for example, and may generate amodulated signal.

Note that an example of a configuration of a receiving apparatus of aterminal is as illustrated in FIGS. 23 and 78, and the configuration inFIG. 78 will be described later. When a modulated signal transmitted bythe base station is received, a receiving apparatus of a terminalobtains a first preamble and/or a second preamble, to obtain informationon a data symbol group to be demodulated, and subsequently extracts adesired data symbol group, and performs demodulation and errorcorrection decoding on the extracted data symbol group, thus obtainingreceived data.

In FIG. 75, a terminal includes single antenna 7500-04 for transmission,but the present disclosure is not limited to a single antenna, and theterminal may include a plurality of antennas for transmission. At thistime, a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted using theplurality of transmission antennas, and transmitter 7500-02 generates aplurality of modulated signals.

Similarly, in FIG. 75, a terminal includes single antenna 7500-05 forreception, but the present disclosure is not limited to a singleantenna, and the terminal may include a plurality of antennas forreception. At this time, a plurality of modulated signals are receivedusing the plurality of antennas, and receiver 7500-07 performs signalprocessing on the plurality of modulated signals, thus obtainingreceived data.

FIG. 76 illustrates an example of a configuration of a transmitterincluded in the base station (AP) in the present exemplary embodiment.Note that in FIG. 76, the same reference numerals are assigned toelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 58.

Transmitting method designation information 5811 includes information onallocation of data symbol groups to the terminals. For example,transmitting method designation information 5811 includes informationindicating that “data symbol group #1 is for transmitting data toterminal #8”.

Transmitting method instructing unit 5812 receives an input oftransmitting method designation information 5811, and outputsinformation 5813 on a transmitting method. For example, information 5813on a transmitting method includes information on allocation of datasymbol groups to terminals, information on a method for transmittingdata symbol groups, information on a method for modulating data symbolgroups, information on an error correction coding method (code length,coding rate) for data symbol groups, and information on a frameconfiguration.

Data symbol group generator 7600-00 receives inputs of data 5801 andinformation 5813 on a transmitting method, and generates basebandsignals for data symbol groups based on information 5813 on atransmitting method.

Frame configuring unit 7600-01 receives inputs of baseband signals 5805for data symbols, baseband signal 5808 for a control information symbol,baseband signal 5810 for a pilot symbol, and information 5813 on atransmitting method. Frame configuring unit 7600-01 generates andoutputs modulated signal 7600-02 according to, for example, the frameconfiguration in FIG. 54, based on information on the frameconfiguration included in information 5813 on a transmitting method.Note that as described above, the frame configuration is not limited tothe frame configuration in FIG. 54.

Radio unit 5861 receives inputs of modulated signal 7600-02 according toa frame configuration, and information on a transmitting method. Radiounit 5816 performs processes such as frequency conversion andamplification on modulated signal 7600-02 according to a frameconfiguration, and generates and outputs transmission signal 5817.Transmission signal 5817 is output as a radio wave from antenna 5818.

FIG. 77 illustrates an example of a configuration of data symbol groupgenerator 7600-00 included in the base station (AP) in FIG. 76.

Data symbol group #1 generator 7700-02-1 receives inputs of data #1(7700-01-1) and information 7700-00 (5813) on transmitting methods. Datasymbol group #1 generator 7700-02-1 performs processes such as errorcorrection coding and modulation, based on information on allocation ofdata symbol groups to terminals, information on methods for transmittingdata symbol groups, information on methods for modulating data symbolgroups, and information on error correction coding methods (code length,coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in information7700-00 on transmitting methods, and outputs a baseband signal for datasymbol group #1 7700-03-1.

Data symbol group #2 generator 7700-02-2 receives inputs of data #2(7700-01-2) and information 7700-00 (5813) on transmitting methods. Datasymbol group #2 generator 7700-02-2 performs processes such as errorcorrection coding and modulation, based on information on allocation ofdata symbol groups to terminals, information on methods for transmittingdata symbol groups, information on methods for modulating data symbolgroups, and information on error correction coding methods (code length,coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in information7700-00 on transmitting methods, and outputs a baseband signal for datasymbol group #2 7700-03-2.

Similar processing continues.

Data symbol group #m generator 7700-02-m receives inputs of data #m(7700-01-m) and information 7700-00 (5813) on transmitting methods. Datasymbol group #m generator 7700-02-m performs processes such as errorcorrection coding and modulation, based on information on allocation ofdata symbol groups to terminals, information on methods for transmittingdata symbol groups, information on methods for modulating data symbolgroups, and information on error correction coding methods (code length,coding rate) for data symbol groups, which are included in information7700-00 on transmitting methods, and outputs a baseband signal for datasymbol group #m 7700-03-m (note that m is an integer greater than orequal 1 or an integer greater than or equal to 2).

FIG. 78 illustrates an example of a configuration of a receiver includedin a terminal in the present exemplary embodiment. Note that in FIG. 78,the same reference numerals are assigned to elements which operate inthe same manner as those in FIG. 23.

OFDM method related processor 2303_X receives an input of receivedsignal 2302_X received by antenna 2301_X. OFDM method related processor2303_X performs OFDM-related signal processing, and outputs signal2304_X obtained as a result of the signal processing.

First preamble detector/demodulator 2311 receives an input of signal2304_X obtained as a result of the signal processing. For example, firstpreamble detector/demodulator 2311 detects and demodulates the firstpreamble in FIG. 54, and outputs first preamble control information2312. Note that this may be applicable to another frame configurationother than the frame configuration in FIG. 54.

Second preamble demodulator 2313 receives inputs of signal 2304_Xobtained as a result of the signal processing and first preamble controlinformation 2312. For example, second preamble demodulator 2313demodulates the second preamble in FIG. 54, and outputs second preamblecontrol information 2314.

Control signal generator 2315 receives inputs of first preamble controlinformation 2312 and second preamble control information 2314, andoutputs control signal 2316. Note that control signal 2316 includesinformation on allocation of data symbol groups to terminals.

Channel fluctuation estimator 7800-01 receives inputs of signal 2304_Xobtained as a result of the signal processing and control signal 2316.Signal processor 2309 receives inputs of signal 2304_X obtained as aresult of the signal processing and control signal 2316. Based oncontrol signal 2316, channel fluctuation estimator 7800-01 estimates achannel using a preamble and a pilot symbol included in signal 2304_Xobtained as a result of the signal processing, and outputs channelestimation signal 7800-02.

Signal processor 2309 receives inputs of channel estimation signal7800-02, signal 2304_X obtained as a result of the signal processing,and control signal 2316. Based on information on allocation of datasymbol groups to terminals included in control signal 2316, signalprocessor 2309 extracts a desired data symbol group from signal 2304_Xobtained as a result of the signal processing, performs processes suchas demodulation and error correction decoding on the extracted datasymbol group, and outputs received data 2310.

As described above, a terminal which is a destination is suitably setfor each data symbol group in a modulated signal which the base station(AP) transmits, whereby an advantageous effect of improvement inefficiency of data transmission by the base station (AP) can beobtained.

For example, when the base station (AP) transmits a frame as illustratedin FIG. 54 by time division, the above transmitting method is superiorin respect of improvement in efficiency of data transmission.

Note that as described in other exemplary embodiments, particularsymbols (5304, 5305) are arranged at particular carriers as illustratedin FIG. 53 in a period from time t1 to time t3 in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 54. At this time, the particular symbols (5304,5305) at the particular carriers may be data symbol groups. For example,the symbols at a particular carrier may be data symbol group #100.

Exemplary Embodiment D

The present exemplary embodiment gives a supplementary description withregard to “a method of inserting dummy symbols (or dummy slots) in adata symbol group” described with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal which a base station (AP) transmits in the present exemplaryembodiment, and the same reference numerals are assigned to an elementwhich operates in the same manner as in FIG. 2.

FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal that the base station (AP) in the present exemplary embodimenttransmits, and the vertical axis indicates frequency, whereas thehorizontal axis indicates time.

In the frame, there are carrier 1 to carrier 64 in the frequencydirection, and there are symbols for each carrier.

The base station (AP) transmits first preamble 201 and second preamble202 in a period from time t0 to time t1, as illustrated in FIG. 79.

In a period from time t1 time t2, the base station (AP) transmits datasymbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2)7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group#FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04.

In a period from time t2 to time t3, the base station (AP) transmitsfirst preamble 7900-51 and second preamble 7900-52.

In a period from time t3 to time t4, the base station (AP) transmitsdata symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6)7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8(#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09.

In a period from time t4 to time t5, the base station (AP) transmitsfirst preamble 7900-53 and second preamble 7900-54.

In a period from time t5 to time t6, the base station (AP) transmitsdata symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11(#TD11) 7900-11.

In FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is a data symbolgroup for which carrier 1 to carrier 15 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time $1 to time $10000 are used in the time direction(there are symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbolsin the time direction).

Similarly, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is a data symbol groupfor which carrier 16 to carrier 31 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time $1 to time $10000 are used in the time direction(there are symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbolsin the time direction).

Data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is a data symbol group for whichcarrier 32 to carrier 46 are used in the frequency axis direction andtime $1 to time $10000 are used in the time direction. There are symbolsin the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in the timedirection.

Data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is a data symbol group for whichcarrier 47 to carrier 64 are used in the frequency axis direction, andtime $1 to time $10000 are used in the time direction. There are symbolsin the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in the timedirection.

As described above, in the frame in FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD1(#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbolgroup #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04are subjected to frequency division multiplexing.

In FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is a data symbolgroup for which carrier 1 to carrier 15 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time ♭1 to time ♭8000 are used in the time direction.There are symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbolsin the time direction.

Similarly, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is a data symbol groupfor which carrier 16 to carrier 29 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time ♭1 to time ♭8000 are used in the time direction.There are symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbolsin the time direction.

Data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is a data symbol group for whichcarrier 30 to carrier 38 are used in the frequency axis direction andtime ♭1 to time ♭8000 are used in the time direction. There are symbolsin the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in the timedirection.

Data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is a data symbol group for whichcarrier 39 to carrier 52 are used in the frequency axis direction andtime ♭1 to time ♭8000 are used in the time direction. There are symbolsin the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in the timedirection.

Data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is a data symbol group for whichcarrier 53 to carrier 64 are used in the frequency axis direction andtime ♭1 to time ♭8000 are used in the time direction. There are symbolsin the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in the timedirection.

Accordingly, in the frame in FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5)7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7(#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbolgroup #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 are subjected to frequency divisionmultiplexing.

In FIG. 79, data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is a data symbolgroup for which carrier 1 to carrier 64 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time *1 to time *50 are used in the time direction. Thereare symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in thetime direction.

Similarly, data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 is a data symbolgroup for which carrier 1 to carrier 64 are used in the frequency axisdirection and time *51 to time *81 are used in the time direction. Thereare symbols in the carrier direction, and also there are symbols in thetime direction.

Note that FIG. 79 illustrates the case where data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 aresubjected to time division multiplexing, yet a configuration may beadopted in which data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 is notincluded, for example. In addition, a frame configuration in which thefirst preamble and the second preamble are included between data symbolgroup #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11may be adopted as another example.

Note that first preambles 201, 7900-51, and 7900-53 in FIG. 79 mayinclude symbols other than preamble symbols (or may not include symbolsother than preamble symbols). In addition, not all the carriers fromcarrier 1 to carrier 64 may be used to transmit symbols of the firstpreamble. For example, a symbol whose in-phase component I is zero andquadrature component Q is zero may be present at a particular carrier.

Similarly, second preambles 202, 7900-52, and 7900-54 in FIG. 79 mayinclude a symbol other than preamble symbols, or may not include symbolsother than preamble symbols. In addition, not all the carriers fromcarrier 1 to carrier 64 may be used to transmit symbols of the secondpreamble. For example, a symbol whose in-phase component I is zero andquadrature component Q is zero may be present at a particular carrier.

Data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2)7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, data symbol group #FD4(#TFD4) 7900-04, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbolgroup #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, datasymbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9)7900-09, data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10, and data symbol group#TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11 may include a symbol other than a data symbol ormay not include a symbol other than a data symbol. At a particularcarrier, there may be a pilot symbol which can be used for channelfluctuation estimation, phase noise estimation, frequency offsetestimation, frequency synchronization, and time synchronization, forinstance.

In FIG. 79, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 and data symbol group#FD (#TFD5) 7900-05 are both transmitted using carrier 1 to carrier 15,and are symbols arranged at particular carriers and corresponding tosymbols 5304 and 5305 arranged at particular carriers in FIG. 53, in adescription given with reference to FIGS. 52, 53, and 54 in the sixthexemplary embodiment.

Note that a data symbol group and a terminal may be given a relation asdescribed in Exemplary Embodiment C. With regard to this point, asdescribed in detail in Exemplary Embodiment C, for example:

-   -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #1 using data        symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #1.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #2 using data        symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #2.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #3 using data        symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #3.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #4 using data        symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #4.        As described above, frequency division multiple access is        performed using data symbol groups present in a period from time        t1 to time t2. Note that orthogonal frequency division multiple        access (OFDMA) is performed when the OFDM method is used.

Similarly,

-   -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #A, using data        symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #A.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #B using data        symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #B.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #C using data        symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #C.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #D using data        symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #D.    -   The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #E using data        symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09. Accordingly, data symbol        group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is a data symbol group for        transmitting data to terminal #E.        As described above, frequency division multiple access is        performed using data symbol groups present in a period from time        t3 to time t4. Note that orthogonal frequency division multiple        access (OFDMA) is performed when the OFDM method is used.

The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #α using data symbolgroup #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10. Accordingly, data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 is a data symbol group for transmitting data toterminal a.

The base station (AP) transmits data to terminal #p using data symbolgroup #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11. Accordingly, data symbol group #TD11(#TFD11) 7900-11 is a data symbol group for transmitting data toterminal p.

Data symbol groups subjected to time division (or time divisionmultiplexing), frequency division (or frequency division multiplexing),and time domain division and frequency domain division (or time domaindivision multiplexing and frequency domain division multiplexing) in theframes illustrated in, for instance, FIGS. 54 and 79 have beendescribed. Note that the following is applicable to the frames describedin the specification, not limited to the frames illustrated in FIGS. 54and 79.

The following describes another example of a configuration of a timeboundary or a frequency boundary between data symbol groups.

For example, a state as illustrated in FIG. 80 is considered when datasymbol groups are divided in the time direction. FIG. 80 is a diagramillustrating an example of division in the time direction.

In FIG. 80, the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axisindicates frequency (carrier). FIG. 80 illustrates an example in which afirst area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area are obtainedas data symbol groups by division in the time direction.

As illustrated in FIG. 80, the first area and the second area arepresent at time t1. At time t2 and time t3, the second area and thethird area are present. The third area and the fourth area do notoverlap in the time direction. Cases including such cases are defined asbeing “divided in the time direction”. For example, time division may beperformed such that a plurality of data symbol groups are present at acertain time as illustrated in FIG. 80.

Furthermore, an area may have different time widths at differentfrequencies, as can be seen from the first area to the third area inFIG. 80. Specifically, an area may not be a quadrilateral in atime-frequency plane. Cases including such cases are defined as being“divided in the time direction”.

For example, a state as illustrated in FIG. 81 is to be considered whendividing data symbol groups in the frequency direction. FIG. 81 is adiagram illustrating an example of the division in the frequencydirection.

In FIG. 81, the horizontal axis indicates frequency (carrier), and thevertical axis indicates time. FIG. 81 illustrates an example of a casein which a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth areaare obtained as data symbol groups by division in the frequencydirection.

As illustrated in FIG. 81, the first area and the second area arepresent at carrier c1. Furthermore, the second area and the third areaare present at carrier c2 and carrier c3. The third area and the fourtharea do not overlap in the frequency direction. The cases including suchcases are defined as being “divided in the frequency direction”. Forexample, frequency division may be performed such that a plurality ofdata symbol groups are present at a certain frequency (carrier) asillustrated in FIG. 81.

Furthermore, an area may have different frequency widths at differenttimes, as can be seen from the first area to the third area in FIG. 81.Specifically, an area may not be a quadrilateral in a time-frequencyplane. The cases including such cases are defined as being “divided inthe frequency direction”.

When data symbol groups are subjected to time domain division andfrequency domain division (or time domain division multiplexing andfrequency domain division multiplexing), the data symbol groups may bedivided in the time direction as illustrated in FIG. 80, and divided inthe frequency direction as illustrated in FIG. 81. Specifically, onearea of a data symbol group in a time-frequency plane may have differentfrequency widths at different times, and furthermore may have differenttime widths at different frequencies.

Of course, frequency division may be performed to obtain data symbolgroups as shown by data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbolgroup #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, anddata symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 in FIG. 79, so that there is nocarrier (frequency) at which two or more data symbol groups are present.

Furthermore, time division may be performed so as to obtain data symbolgroup #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TD11) 7900-11as illustrated in FIG. 79, so that there is no time (time period) atwhich two or more data symbol groups are present.

FIG. 64 illustrates an example in which dummy symbols (or dummy slots)are inserted in data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 in FIG. 79, forexample. An example similar to the following example has already beendescribed with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

For example, data symbols are preferentially arranged from a smallertime index in data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01. A rule that ifdata symbols are arranged at all the occupied carriers at a certaintime, data symbols are arranged at carriers at a time subsequent to thecertain time is adopted.

For example, in data symbol group #TFD1 (3401), as illustrated in FIG.64, a data symbol is arranged at carrier 1 at time $10001, andthereafter data symbols are arranged at carrier 2 at time $10001,carrier 3 at time $10001, . . . , carrier 9 at time $10001, and carrier10 at time $10001. Then, moving onto time $10002, data symbols arearranged at carrier 1 at time $10002, carrier 2 at time $10002, and soon.

At time $13995, data symbols are arranged at carrier 1 at time $13995,carrier 2 at time $13995, carrier 3 at time $13995, carrier 4 at time$13995, carrier 5 at time $13995, and carrier 6 at time $13995. Thiscompletes arrangement of data symbols.

However, symbols as data symbol group #TFD1 (3401) are present atcarrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time $13995, carrier1 to carrier 10 at time $13996, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13997,carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13998, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time$13999, and carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $14000. Thus, dummy symbolsare arranged at carrier 7, carrier 8, carrier 9, and carrier 10 at time$13995, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13996, carrier 1 to carrier 10at time $13997, carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $13998, carrier 1 tocarrier 10 at time $13999, and carrier 1 to carrier 10 at time $14000.

If necessary, dummy symbols are also arranged in, using the same methodas above, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group#FD3, (#TFD3) 7900-03, data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, datasymbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6)7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8(#TFD8) 7900-08, data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09, data symbolgroup #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10, and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11)7900-11 in FIG. 79.

As described above, a dummy symbol is inserted in a data symbol groupsubjected to time division multiplexing, a data symbol group subjectedto time division multiplexing, and a data symbol group for which aparticular carrier is used, whereby a receiving apparatus readily sortsout data symbols, and demodulates and decodes data, and furthermore anadvantageous effect of preventing a fall in the data transmission ratedue to dummy symbols can be obtained.

Note that in the example in FIG. 79, a frame in which “preambles”,“symbols subjected to frequency division”, “preambles”, “symbolssubjected to frequency division”, “preambles”, “symbols subjected totime division”, or in other words, “preambles”, “symbols subjected tofrequency division”, “preambles”, “symbols subjected to frequencydivision”, “preambles”, “symbol groups not subjected to frequencydivision” are arranged along the time axis in this order has beendescribed, yet the present disclosure is not limited to this. Forexample, a frame in which “preambles”, “symbols subjected to timedivision”, “preambles”, and “symbols subjected to frequency division”are arranged in this order along the time axis may be adopted, or aframe in which “preambles”, “symbol groups not subjected to frequencydivision”, “preambles”, and “symbols subjected to frequency division”are arranged in this order along the time axis may be adopted.

A method of inserting a dummy symbol group in a data symbol group is notlimited to the method illustrated in FIG. 64. The following describes anexample of a method of inserting dummy symbols, which is different fromthe method illustrated in FIG. 64.

The number of symbols (or the number of slots) is U in data symbol group#TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group #TD Z (forexample, X, Y, and Z are integers greater than or equal to 1). U is aninteger greater than or equal to 1.

First, “V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1) which denotesthe number of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data which is anintegral multiple of a FEC block (having a block length of an errorcorrection code or a code length of an error correction code) is fitted”is secured. Note that U−α+1≤V≤U is to be satisfied. α denotes the numberof symbols (or the number of slots) necessary to transmit a block havingthe block length of an error correction code (code length) (unit: bit),and is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

When U−V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U−V symbols (or U−V slots)are added. Thus, data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, ordata symbol group #TD Z includes data symbols of V symbols (or V slots)and dummy symbols of U−V symbols (or U−V slots). Each dummy symbol has acertain value for in-phase component I, and also a certain value forquadrature component Q.

Data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group#TD Z satisfy “including data symbols of V symbols (or V slots) anddummy symbols of U−V symbols (or U−V slots).

Specifically, when data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y,and data symbol group #TD Z need to have dummy symbols (or dummy slots),dummy symbols (dummy slots) are inserted in each data symbol group.

An example of a configuration of the base station (AP) which utilizes adummy symbol insertion method is described.

The configuration of the base station (AP) is the configuration in FIG.1 in which data generator 102 and frame configuring unit 110 arereplaced with those in FIG. 82. The following describes FIG. 82.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 82 whichoperate in the same manner as those in FIG. 1.

Error correction encoder 8200-02-1 for data symbol group #1 receivesinputs of data 8200-01-1 for data symbol group #1 (for terminal #1, forexample) and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based on information on anerror correction coding method included in control signals 8200-00 and109 such as, for example, information on an error correction code, thecode length of an error correction code, and the coding rate of an errorcorrection code, error correction encoder 8200-02-1 performs errorcorrection coding on data 8200-01-1 for data symbol group #1, andoutputs data 8200-03-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result oferror correction coding.

Similarly, error correction encoder 8200-02-2 for data symbol group #2receives inputs of data 8200-01-2 for data symbol group #2 (for terminal#2, for example) and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based oninformation on an error correction coding method included in controlsignals 8200-00 and 109 such as, for example, information on an errorcorrection code, the code length of an error correction code, and thecoding rate of an error correction code, error correction encoder8200-02-2 performs error correction coding on data 8200-01-2 for datasymbol group #2, and outputs data 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2obtained as a result of error correction coding.

Similar processing continues.

Error correction encoder 8200-02-N for data symbol group #N (N is aninteger greater than or equal to 1) receives inputs of data 8200-01-Nfor data symbol group #N (for terminal #N, for example) and controlsignals 8200-00 and 109. Based on information on an error correctioncoding method included in control signals 8200-00 and 109 such as, forexample, information on an error correction code, the code length of anerror correction code, and the coding rate of an error correction code,error correction encoder 8200-02-N performs error correction coding ondata 8200-01-N for data symbol group #N, and outputs data 8200-03-N fordata symbol group #N obtained as a result of error correction coding.

Interleaver 8200-04-1 for data symbol group 1 receives inputs of data8200-03-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result of errorcorrection coding and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based oninformation on an rearrangement method included in control signals8200-00 and 109, interleaver 8200-04-1 rearranges data 8200-03-1 fordata symbol group #1 obtained as a result of error correction coding,and outputs rearranged data 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1.

Similarly, interleaver 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2 receivesinputs of data 8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a resultof error correction coding and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based oninformation on the rearrangement method included in control signals8200-00 and 109, interleaver 8200-04-2 rearranges data 8200-03-2 fordata symbol group #2 obtained as a result of error correction coding,and outputs rearranged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2.

Similar processing continues.

Interleaver 8200-04-N for data symbol group #N receives inputs of data8200-3-N for data symbol group #N obtained as a result of errorcorrection coding and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based oninformation on a rearrangement method included in control signals8200-00 and 109, interleaver 8200-04-N rearranges data 8200-03-N fordata symbol group #N obtained as a result of error correction coding,and outputs rearranged data 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N.

Mapper 8200-06-1 for data symbol group #1 receives inputs of rearrangeddata 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1 and control signals 8200-00 and109. Based on information on a modulation method included in controlsignals 8200-00 and 109, mapper 8200-06-1 maps rearranged data 8200-05-1for data symbol group #1, and outputs signal 8200-07-1 for data symbolgroup #1 obtained as a result of mapping the data.

Similarly, mapper 8200-06-2 for data symbol group #2 receives inputs ofrearranged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2 and control signals8200-00 and 109. Based on information on a modulation method included incontrol signals 8200-00 and 109, mapper 8200-06-2 maps rearranged data8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2, and outputs signal 8200-07-2 fordata symbol group #2 obtained as a result of mapping the data.

Similar processing continues.

Mapper 8200-06-N for data symbol group #N receives inputs of rearrangeddata 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N and control signals 8200-00 and109. Based on information on a modulation method included in controlsignals 8200-00 and 109, mapper 8200-06-N maps rearranged data 8200-05-Nfor data symbol group #N, and outputs signal 8200-07-N for data symbolgroup #1 obtained as a result of mapping the data.

Frame configuring unit 110 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-1 for datasymbol group #1 obtained as a result of mapping the data, signal8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of mapping thedata, . . . , and signal 8200-07-N for data symbol group #N obtained asa result of mapping the data, (quadrature) baseband signal 106 for thesecond preamble, and control signals 8200-00 and 109. Based oninformation on a frame configuration included in control signals 8200-00and 109, examples of which are the frame configurations illustrated in,for instance, FIGS. 54 and 79, frame configuring unit 110 outputs(quadrature) baseband signal 8201_1 for stream 1 according to the frameconfiguration and/or (quadrature) baseband signal 8201_2 for stream 2according to the frame configuration. Note that the frame configurationsare not limited to those illustrated in FIGS. 54 and 79.

For example, when control signals 8200-00 and 109 designate MIMOtransmission and MISO transmission, frame configuring unit 110 outputs(quadrature) baseband signal 8201_1 for stream 1 according to a frameconfiguration, and (quadrature) baseband signal 8201_2 for stream 2according to a frame configuration.

When control signals 8200-00 and 109 designate SISO transmission, frameconfiguring unit 110 outputs, for example, (quadrature) baseband signal8201_1 for stream 1 according to a frame configuration.

Note that the subsequent processing is as illustrated with reference toFIG. 1. In addition, the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 82are examples of a configuration of a device, and the present disclosureis not limited to the configurations.

A description of another example of a configuration of the base station(AP) is given.

Another configuration of the base station (AP) is a configurationillustrated in FIG. 76, in which data symbol group generator 7600-00 andframe configuring unit 7600-01 are replaced with those in FIG. 83.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 83 whichoperate in the same manner as in FIGS. 58, 76, and 82, and descriptionof such elements is omitted.

Frame configuring unit 7600-01 receives inputs of signal 8200-07-1 fordata symbol group #1 obtained as a result of mapping data, signal8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of mapping data,. . . , signal 8200-07-N for data symbol group #N obtained as a resultof mapping data, baseband signal 5808 for a control symbol, basebandsignal 5810 for a pilot symbol, and control signals 8200-00 and 5831.Based on information on a frame configuration included in controlsignals 8200-00 and 5831, examples of which are the frame configurationsillustrated in, for instance, FIGS. 54 and 79, frame configuring unit7600-01 outputs modulated signal 7600-02 according to the frameconfiguration. Note that the frame configurations are not limited tothose illustrated in FIGS. 54 and 79.

Note that the subsequent processes are as described with reference toFIG. 76. The configurations illustrated in FIGS. 76 and 83 show examplesof an apparatus, but the present disclosure is not limited to theconfigurations.

Examples of operation of interleaver 8200-04-1 for data symbol group #1,interleaver 8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2, . . . , and interleaver8200-04-N for data symbol group #N in FIGS. 82 and 83, for instance aredescribed with reference to FIG. 84.

The number of symbols (or the number of slots) in data symbol group #TFDX, data symbol group #FD Y, data symbol group #TD Z (for example, X, Y,and Z are integers greater than or equal to 1) is U. U is an integergreater than or equal to 1. The number of bits for transmitting eachsymbol (or each slot) is C. C is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

“V (which is an integer greater than or equal to 1) which denotes thenumber of symbols (or the number of slots) in which data which is anintegral multiple of a FEC block (having a block length of an errorcorrection code or a code length of an error correction code) is fitted”is secured. Note that U−α+1≤V≤U is to be satisfied (a denotes the numberof symbols (or the number of slots) necessary to transmit a block havingthe block length of an error correction code (code length) (unit: bit),and is an integer greater than or equal to 1).

When U−V≠0, dummy symbols (or dummy slots) of U−V symbols (or U−V slots)are added. Thus, data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, ordata symbol group #TD Z includes data symbols of V symbols (or V slots)and dummy symbols of U−V symbols (or U−V slots). Each dummy symbol has acertain value for in-phase component I, and also a certain value forquadrature component Q.

Data symbol group #TFD X, data symbol group #FD Y, and data symbol group#TD Z satisfy “including data symbols of V symbols (or V slots) anddummy symbols of U−V symbols (or U−V slots).

Thus, when U−V≠0, the number of bits of “data for data symbols (which isan integral multiple of a FEC block (having a block length of an errorcorrection code) or (having a code length of an error correction code)is C×V=A×C×α bits (A is an integer greater than or equal to 1), and thenumber of bits of data for dummy symbols is C×(U−V).

FIG. 84 illustrates when U−V≠0, examples of operation of interleaver8200-04-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-04-2 for datasymbol group #2, . . . , and interleaver 8200-04-N for data symbol group#N in, for example, FIGS. 82 and 83 with respect to “data for datasymbols” having C×V=A×C×α bits (A is an integer greater than or equalto 1) and “data for dummy symbols” having C×(U−V) bits.

Part (a) of FIG. 84 illustrates an example of a configuration of databefore being rearranged. For example, data is arranged in the order ofdata for data symbols and data for dummy symbols. Note that thearrangement of data before being rearranged is not limited to (a) inFIG. 84.

Part (b) of FIG. 84 illustrates data obtained by rearranging thesequence of data illustrated in (a) of FIG. 84. Specifically, (b) ofFIG. 84 illustrates data obtained by rearranging data of C×U bits. Amethod of rearranging data may be performed according to any rule.

Mapper 8200-06-1 for data symbol group #1, mapper 8200-06-2 for datasymbol group #2, . . . , and mapper 8200-06-N for data symbol group #Nillustrated in, for instance, FIGS. 82 and 83 map rearranged dataillustrated in (b) of FIG. 84.

Note that a method of rearranging data used by interleaver 8200-04-1 fordata symbol group #1, a method of rearranging data used by interleaver8200-04-2 for data symbol group #2, . . . , and a method of rearrangingdata used by interleaver 8200-04-N for data symbol group #N may be thesame as or different from one another.

As described above, when “data for data symbols” and “data for dummysymbols” are rearranged, arrangement of data symbols and dummy symbolsof a data symbol group is not limited to the arrangement as illustratedin FIG. 64. For example, dummy symbols may be arranged at any positionwithin a data symbol group along time and frequency axes. In addition,there may be a case where symbols or slots include “data” and “dummydata”.

Interleaver 8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-05-2for data symbol group #2, . . . , and interleaver 8200-05-N for datasymbol group #N may switch between rearrangement methods for each frame.One or more (interleavers) of interleaver 8200-05-1 for data symbolgroup #1, interleaver 8200-05-2 for data symbol group #2, . . . , andinterleaver 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N may not rearrange data.For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data symbol group#FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 and data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 arrangedat particular carriers in FIG. 79 are not rearranged. This yields anadvantageous effect that a receiving apparatus can obtain data of a datasymbol group at a particular carrier with less delay.

FIG. 85 illustrates an example of a configuration of interleaver8200-05-1 for data symbol group #1, interleaver 8200-05-2 for datasymbol group #2, . . . , and interleaver 8200-05-N for data symbol group#N. Note that the same reference numerals are assigned to elements whichoperate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 82 and 83.

Dummy data generator 8500-01 receives an input of control signal8200-00. Dummy data generator 8500-01 generates dummy data, based oninformation on dummy data included in control signal 8200-00, an exampleof which is the number of bits used to create dummy data, and outputsdummy data 8500-02.

Interleaver 8500-04 receives inputs of data 8500-03 obtained as a resultof error correction coding (corresponding to data 8200-03-1 for datasymbol group #1 obtained as a result of error correction coding, data8200-03-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained as a result of errorcorrection coding, . . . , and data 8200-03-N for data symbol group #Nobtained as a result of error correction coding in FIGS. 82 and 83, forinstance), dummy data 8500-02, and control signal 8200-00. Based oninformation on an interleaving method included in control signal8200-00, interleaver 8500-04 rearranges data 8500-03 obtained as aresult of error correction coding and dummy data 8500-02, and outputsrearranged data 8500-05 (corresponding to rearranged data 8200-05-1 fordata symbol group #1, rearranged data 8200-05-2 for data symbol group#2, . . . , and rearranged data 8200-05-N for data symbol group #N inFIGS. 82 and 83, for instance).

Note that, for example, a method of configuring data (or dummy data) ofa dummy symbol using data known to a transmitting apparatus and areceiving apparatus is conceivable.

For example, the first preamble and/or the second preamble in a frame asillustrated in FIGS. 54 and 79 may include information such as“information relevant to a carrier and time which each data symbol groupuses”, “information relevant to the number of bits (or the number ofsymbols) of dummy data (or dummy symbols) to be inserted in each datasymbol group”, “information on a method of transmitting each data symbolgroup”, “information relevant to a method of modulating (or a set ofmethods of modulating) each data symbol group”, “information relevant toan interleaving method used by each data symbol group”, and “informationrelevant to an error correction code used by each data symbol group”.Accordingly, the receiving apparatus can demodulate data symbols of eachdata symbol group. Note that the frame configurations are not limited tothose illustrated in FIGS. 54 and 79, for instance.

As described above, data for data symbols is arranged discretely insymbols present along the time and frequency axes by rearranging datafor data symbols and dummy data, whereby time and frequency diversitygains can be obtained, so that an advantageous effect of improvingquality of data received by the receiving apparatus can be obtained.

Another example of a configuration of a base station (AP) to which adummy symbol insertion method is applied.

The configuration of a base station (AP) is a configuration in FIG. 1 inwhich data generator 102 and frame configuring unit 110 are replacedwith those in FIG. 86. The following describes FIG. 86.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 86 whichoperates in the same manner as those in FIGS. 1 and 82, and descriptionof such elements is omitted.

Carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 for data symbol group #1 receives inputsof signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1 obtained as a result ofmapping data, and control signal 8200-00. Carrier interleaver 8600-01-1interleaves a carrier for signal 8200-07-1 for data symbol group #1obtained as a result of mapping data, based on information on a carrierinterleaving method included in control signal 8200-00, and outputssignal 8600-02-1 for data symbol group #1 for which the carrier has beeninterleaved. Note that interleaving of carriers is described later.

Similarly, carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbol group #2receives inputs of signal 8200-07-2 for data symbol group #2 obtained asa result of mapping data, and control signal 8200-00. Carrierinterleaver 8600-01-2 interleaves a carrier for signal 8200-07-2 fordata symbol group #2 obtained as a result of mapping data, based oninformation on a carrier interleaving method included in control signal8200-00, and outputs signal 8600-02-2 for data symbol group #2 for whichthe carrier has been interleaved. Note that interleaving of carriers isdescribed later.

Similar processing continues.

Carrier interleaver 8600-01-N for data symbol group #N receives inputsof signal 8200-07-N for data symbol group #N obtained as a result ofmapping data, and control signal 8200-00. Carrier interleaver 8600-01-Ninterleaves a carrier for signal 8200-07-N for data symbol group #Nobtained as a result of mapping data, based on information on a carrierinterleaving method included in control signal 8200-00, and outputssignal 8600-02-N for data symbol group #N for which the carrier has beeninterleaved. Note that interleaving of carriers is described later.

Note that processing on portions other than this is as described withreference to FIGS. 1 and 82, and thus description thereof is omitted. Inaddition, the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 86 are examplesof a configuration of an apparatus, and thus the present disclosure isnot limited to the configurations.

An example of another configuration of the base station (AP) isdescribed.

Another configuration of a base station (AP) is a configuration in FIG.76 in which data symbol group generator 7600-00 and frame configuringunit 7600-01 are replaced with those in FIG. 87.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 87 whichoperate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 58, 76, 82, and 86, anddescription of such elements is omitted (thus, description of FIG. 87 isomitted).

Note that FIGS. 76 and 87 illustrate examples of a configuration of anapparatus, and the present disclosure is not limited to suchconfigurations.

The following describes, with reference to FIG. 88, an example ofoperation of interleaving of carriers by carrier interleaver 8600-01-1for data symbol group #1, carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbolgroup #2, . . . , and carrier interleaver 8600-01-N for data symbolgroup #N in FIGS. 86 and 87.

Part (a) in FIG. 88 illustrates an example of a symbol configuration ofa data symbol group before interleaving of carriers, where thehorizontal axis indicates time, and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency (carrier). As illustrated in (a) of FIG. 88, symbols atcarrier $1 are named a first symbol column, symbols at carrier $2 arenamed a second symbol column, symbols at carrier $3 are named a thirdsymbol column, symbols at carrier $4 are named a fourth symbol column,symbols at carrier $5 are named a fifth symbol column, symbols atcarrier $6 are named a sixth symbol column, and symbols at carrier $7are named a seventh symbol column. Thus, a data symbol group includesthe first symbol column to the seventh symbol column.

Part (b) of FIG. 88 illustrates an example of a symbol configuration ofa data symbol group after interleaving of carriers.

As illustrated in (a) and (b) of FIG. 88, the first symbol columnarranged at carrier $1 before interleaving of carriers is arranged atcarrier $4 after interleaving of carriers.

The second symbol column arranged at carrier $2 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $6 after interleaving of carriers.

The third symbol column arranged at carrier $3 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $5 after interleaving of carriers.

The fourth symbol column arranged at carrier $4 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $2 after interleaving of carriers.

The fifth symbol column arranged at carrier $5 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $7 after interleaving of carriers.

The sixth symbol column arranged at carrier $6 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $1 after interleaving of carriers.

The seventh symbol column arranged at carrier $7 before interleaving ofcarriers is arranged at carrier $3 after interleaving of carriers.

As shown by the above example, carrier interleaver 8600-01-1 for datasymbol group #1, carrier interleaver 8600-01-2 for data symbol group #2,. . . , and carrier interleaver 8600-01-N for data symbol group #Nchange the carrier positions of symbol columns. Note that interleavingof carriers in FIG. 88 is a mere example, and a carrier interleavingmethod is not limited to this.

As described above, data symbols are arranged so as to increase temporaland frequency diversity gains by interleaving of carriers, and thus anadvantageous effect of improving quality of data received by thereceiving apparatus can be obtained.

As a configuration of a base station (AP) which operates in the samemanner as the base station (AP) having a configuration in FIG. 1 inwhich data generator 102 and frame configuring unit 110 are replacedwith the elements in FIG. 86, a configuration in FIG. 1 in which datagenerator 102 and frame configuring unit 110 are replaced with theelements in FIG. 89 may be adopted.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 89 whichoperate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 1 and 82, and descriptionof such elements is omitted.

Carrier interleaver 8900-01-1 receives inputs of (quadrature) basebandsignal 8201_1 for stream 1, and control signal 8200-00. Carrierinterleaver 8900-01-1 interleaves carriers (see FIG. 88) based oninformation on interleaving of carriers included in control signal8200-00, and outputs baseband signal 8900-02-1 obtained as a result ofinterleaving of carriers.

Similarly, carrier interleaver 8900-01-2 receives inputs of (quadrature)baseband signal 8201_2 for stream 2 and control signal 8200-00. Carrierinterleaver 8900-01-2 interleaves carriers (see FIG. 88) based oninformation on interleaving of carriers included in control signal8200-00, and outputs baseband signal 8900-02-2 obtained as a result ofinterleaving of carriers.

Accordingly, signal processor 112 in FIG. 1 receives an input ofbaseband signal 8900-02-1 obtained as a result of interleaving ofcarriers, instead of (quadrature) baseband signal 111_1 for stream 1,and receives an input of baseband signal 8900-02-2 obtained as a resultof interleaving of carriers, instead of (quadrature) baseband signal111_2 for stream 2.

In FIG. 76, as a configuration of a base station (AP) which operates inthe same manner as the base station (AP) having a configuration in FIG.76 in which data symbol group generator 7600-00 and frame configuringunit 7600-01 are replaced with the elements in FIG. 87, a configurationin FIG. 76 in which data symbol group generator 7600-00 and frameconfiguring unit 7600-01 are replaced with the elements in FIG. 90 maybe adopted.

The same reference numerals are assigned to elements in FIG. 90 whichoperate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 58, 76, and 82, anddescription of such elements is omitted.

Carrier interleaver 9000-01 receives inputs of modulated signal 7600-02and control signal 8200-00, interleaves carriers (see FIG. 88) based oninformation on interleaving of carriers included in control signal8200-00, and outputs baseband signal 9000-02 obtained as a result ofinterleaving of carriers.

Accordingly, radio unit 5816 in FIG. 76 receives an input of basebandsignal 9000-02 obtained as a result of interleaving of carriers, insteadof modulated signal 7600-02.

The above completes description of a method of inserting some dummysymbols or dummy data to a data symbol group. Dummy symbols or dummydata are inserted in such a manner, whereby a receiving apparatusreadily sorts out data symbols, and demodulates and decodes the datasymbols, and furthermore, an advantageous effect of preventing a fall inthe data transmission rate due to dummy symbols or dummy data can beobtained. An advantage that one or more data symbol groups can beefficiently transmitted, or in other words, a transmission speed can beset for each data symbol group can be obtained.

(Supplementary Note 2)

The second exemplary embodiment has described separately setting acarrier (subcarrier) interval when data symbol groups are subjected tofrequency division multiplexing, and a carrier (subcarrier) intervalwhen data symbol groups are subjected to time division multiplexing ornot subjected to frequency division multiplexing. Of course, this isapplicable to Exemplary embodiments C and D.

For example, in FIG. 79, a carrier (subcarrier) interval for a timeperiod in which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbolgroup #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, anddata symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 are transmitted and a carrier(subcarrier) interval for a time period in which data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted may be the same or may be different.Note that FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration whencarrier (subcarrier) intervals are “the same”.

Note that FIG. 91 illustrates an example of a frame configuration whencarrier (subcarrier) intervals are “different”. Note that a channelinterval for a time period in which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1)7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbol group #FD3(#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 aretransmitted and a channel interval for a time period in which datasymbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted is the same. Notethat an occupied frequency band for a time period in which data symbolgroup #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04 are transmitted and an occupied frequency band for a time periodin which data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted may bethe same or may be different. In FIG. 91, the number of carriers(subcarriers) present in a time period in which data symbol group #FD1(#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbolgroup #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04are transmitted is 64, whereas the number of carriers (subcarriers)present in a time period in which data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10)7900-10 is transmitted is 256.

Similarly, in FIG. 79, a carrier (subcarrier) interval for a time periodin which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2(#TFD2) 7900-2, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbolgroup #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 are transmitted, and a carrier (subcarrier)interval for a time period in which the first preamble (or the secondpreamble) is transmitted may be the same or may be different. Note thatFIG. 79 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when carrier(subcarrier) intervals are “the same”.

Note that FIG. 91 illustrates an example of a frame configuration whencarrier (subcarrier) intervals are “different”. However, a channelinterval for a time period in which data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1)7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3(#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 aretransmitted, and a channel interval for a time period in which the firstpreamble (or the second preamble) is transmitted are the same. Note thatan occupied frequency band for a time period in which data symbol group#FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04 are transmitted, and an occupied frequency band for a timeperiod in which the first preamble (or the second preamble) istransmitted may be the same or may be different. In FIG. 91, the numberof carriers (subcarriers) present in a time period in which data symbolgroup #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04 are transmitted is 64, whereas the number of carriers(subcarriers) present in a time period in which the first preamble (orthe second preamble) is transmitted is 256.

In FIG. 79, a carrier (subcarrier) interval for a time period in whichthe first preamble is transmitted, and a carrier (subcarrier) intervalfor a time period in which the second preamble is transmitted may bedifferent.

Note that FIG. 92 illustrates an example when carrier (subcarrier)intervals are “different”. Note that a channel interval for a timeperiod in which the first preamble is transmitted and a channel intervalfor a time period in which the second preamble is transmitted are thesame. However, an occupied frequency band for a time period in which thefirst preamble is transmitted, and an occupied frequency band for a timeperiod in which the second preamble is transmitted may be the same ormay be different. In FIG. 92, the number of carriers (subcarriers)present in a time period in which the first preamble is transmitted is64, whereas the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in a timeperiod in which the second preamble is transmitted is 256.

In FIG. 79, a carrier (subcarrier) interval for a time period in whichthe first preamble is transmitted and a carrier (subcarrier) intervalfor a time period in which data symbol group #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 istransmitted may be different.

Note that FIG. 93 illustrates an example when carrier (subcarrier)intervals are “different”. Note that a channel interval for a timeperiod in which the first preamble is transmitted and a channel intervalfor a time period in which data symbol group #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 istransmitted are the same. Note that an occupied frequency band for atime period in which the first preamble is transmitted, and an occupiedfrequency band for a time period in which data symbol group #TFD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted may be the same or may be different. InFIG. 93, the number of carriers (subcarriers) present in a time periodin which the first preamble is transmitted is 64, whereas the number ofcarriers (subcarriers) present in a time period in which data symbolgroup #TFD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted is 256.

Note that the above description of the supplementary note has been givenusing the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 as an example, yetan applicable frame configuration is not limited to this. An exemplaryembodiment to be combined with the second exemplary embodiment is notlimited to Exemplary Embodiment C and Exemplary Embodiment D. When thesecond exemplary embodiment is combined with Exemplary Embodiment C orwith Exemplary Embodiment D, the above description of the supplementarynote is applied to the combination, and furthermore, terminals areallocated to data symbols, and dummy symbols (or dummy data) are addedto the data symbols.

In this specification, conceivable examples of data included in a datasymbol group include a data packet, a packet of information on an image,a packet of audio information, a packet of information on a video or astill image, a data stream, an image stream, an audio stream, and astream of a video or a still image. The type or a configuration of dataincluded in a data symbol group is not limited to these.

For example, the case where a base station (or an access point (AP), forinstance) transmits a modulated signal indicated by frame configurationsbased on the time and frequency axes described in this specificationsuch as those illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25,26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52,53, 54, 63, 65, and 79 has been described, nevertheless an exemplaryembodiment in which different terminals transmit data symbol groups in aframe configuration based on the time and frequency axes described inthis specification is possible. The following describes this point. Theframe configuration is not limited to those illustrated in the abovedrawings.

For example, the following configuration may be adopted.

For example, the case where a base station (or an access point (AP), forinstance) transmits a modulated signal indicated by frame configurationsbased on the time and frequency axes described in this specificationsuch as those illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25,26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52,53, 54, 63, 65, and 79 has been described, nevertheless an exemplaryembodiment in which different terminals transmit data symbol groups in aframe configuration based on the time and frequency axes described inthis specification is possible. The following describes this point. Theframe configuration is not limited to those illustrated in the abovedrawings.

A modulated signal transmitting method used by a plurality of terminalsbased on the frame configuration in FIG. 94 is to be described.

In FIG. 94, data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01 is transmitted byterminal #1.

Data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 is transmitted by terminal #2.Data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 is transmitted by terminal #3.Data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 is transmitted by terminal #4.Data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05 is transmitted by terminal #5.Data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 is transmitted by terminal #6.Data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 is transmitted by terminal #7.Data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 is transmitted by terminal #8.Data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 is transmitted by terminal #9.Data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 is transmitted by terminal #10.Data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 is transmitted by terminal #11.

FIG. 95 illustrates a state of communication between a base station (AP)and terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, terminal #4, terminal #5,terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, terminal #9, terminal #10, andterminal #11. Part (a) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in which the basestation (AP) transmits a modulated signal, (b) of FIG. 95 illustrates astate in which terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, and terminal #4transmit a modulated signal, (c) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in whichterminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, and terminal #9transmit a modulated signal, (d) of FIG. 95 illustrates a state in whichterminal #10 transmits a modulated signal, and (e) of FIG. 95illustrates a state in which terminal #11 transmits a modulated signal.

As illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs “symboltransmission” 9500-01. For example, control information and data symbolsare transmitted by “symbol transmission” 9500-01. At this time, thecontrol information includes information on a terminal which is totransmit a modulated signal in a period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG.122 (and information on frequency allocation or carrier allocation tothe terminal).

As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, andterminal #4 receive “symbol” 9500-01 transmitted by the base station(AP), and perform “symbol transmission” 9500-02.

At this time, terminal #1 transmits data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1)7900-01 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #2 transmits data symbolgroup #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #3transmits data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03 as illustrated in FIG.94, and terminal #4 transmits data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 asillustrated in FIG. 94.

Next, as illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs “symboltransmission” 9500-03. For example, control information and data symbolsare transmitted by “symbol transmission” 9500-03. At this time, thecontrol information includes information on a terminal which is totransmit a modulated signal in a period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG.94 (and information on frequency allocation or carrier allocation to theterminal).

As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7,terminal #8, and terminal #9 receive “symbol” 9500-03 transmitted by thebase station (AP), and perform “symbol transmission” 9500-04.

At this time, terminal #5 transmits data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5)7900-05 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #6 transmits data symbolgroup #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06 as illustrated in FIG. 94, terminal #7transmits data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07 as illustrated in FIG.94, terminal #8 transmits data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08 asillustrated in FIG. 94, and terminal #9 transmits data symbol group #FD9(#TFD9) 7900-09 as illustrated in FIG. 94.

As illustrated in FIG. 95, the base station (AP) performs “symboltransmission” 9500-05. For example, control information and data symbolsare transmitted by “symbol transmission” 9500-05. At this time, thecontrol information includes information on a terminal which is totransmit a modulated signal in a period from time t5 to time t6 in FIG.94 (and information on time allocation to the terminal).

As illustrated in FIG. 95, terminal #10 and terminal #11 receive“symbol” 9500-05 transmitted by the base station (AP), and terminal #10and terminal #11 perform “symbol transmission” 9500-06 and “symboltransmission” 9500-07, respectively.

At this time, terminal #10 transmits data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10)7900-10 as illustrated in FIG. 94, and terminal #11 transmits datasymbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 as illustrated in FIG. 94.

FIG. 96 illustrates an example of a configuration of data symbol group#FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2, (#TFD2) 7900-02, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04, data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6(#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbolgroup #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09, datasymbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10, and data symbol group #TD11(#TFD11) 7900-11 when terminal #1, terminal #2, terminal #3, terminal#4, terminal #5, terminal #6, terminal #7, terminal #8, terminal #9,terminal #10, and terminal #11 transmit data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1)7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3(#TFD3) 7900-03, data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04, data symbolgroup #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, datasymbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8)7900-08, data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09, data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10, and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11,respectively. Note that in FIG. 96, the horizontal axis indicates timeand the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier).

As illustrated in FIG. 96, each data symbol group includes thirdpreamble 9600-01, fourth preamble 9600-02, and data symbols 9600-03, forexample.

For example, third preamble 9600-01 includes a PSK symbol (known to atransmitting apparatus and a receiving apparatus) for signal detection,time synchronization, and frequency synchronization, and fourth preamble9600-02 includes an automatic gain control (AGC) symbol for thereceiving apparatus to perform AGC, a pilot symbol (reference symbol)for the receiving apparatus to perform channel estimation, terminalinformation for the base station (AP) to identify a terminal, and acontrol information symbol for transmitting information on a method ofmodulating data symbols 9600-03 and an error correction code for datasymbols 9600-03, for instance.

Data symbols 9600-03 include data to be transmitted by a terminal to thebase station (AP).

Note that the arrangement of third preamble 9600-01, fourth preamble9600-02, and the data symbols along the time and frequency axes is notlimited to the arrangement in FIG. 96, and for example, the thirdpreamble and the fourth preamble may be arranged at particular carriers.

The frame configurations described in this specification based on thetime and frequency axes such as those illustrated in, for example, FIGS.2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37,38, 48, 29, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 63, 65, and 79 may each be a frameconfiguration in which a transmitting method is the SISO (or SIMO)method, a frame configuration in which a transmitting method is the MISOmethod, or a frame configuration in which a transmitting method is theMIMO method. Note that this applies to all the frames of all theexemplary embodiments. The frame configurations are not limited to thoseillustrated in the above drawings.

Furthermore, in this specification, a description has been given usingthe OFDM method as an example, yet a portion of the specification inwhich the OFDM method is performed can be achieved in the same mannereven if a transmitting method in which multi-carrier is used is adopted.

Exemplary Embodiment E

The present exemplary embodiment describes a specific example in thecase where a base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal indicated bya frame configuration in FIG. 79, as described in Exemplary embodimentsC and D.

Exemplary Embodiment D has described an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted to data symbol group #FD1(#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbolgroup #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04present in a period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 79, whereas thepresent exemplary embodiment describes an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted to the data symbol groups.

FIG. 97 illustrates an example of a configuration of data symbol group#FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04 present in a period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 79, whendummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted to the datasymbol groups.

At least one of data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbolgroup #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, anddata symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 present in a period from time t1to time t2 in FIG. 79 includes empty symbols (empty slots) 9700-02 asillustrated in FIG. 97. FIG. 97 illustrates an example of aconfiguration of a data symbol group in a period from time t1 to time t2when the horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency (carrier). In FIG. 97, 9700-01 denotes data symbols, and thebase station (AP) transmits data using the symbols.

9700-02 in FIG. 97 denotes empty symbols (or empty slots), and the basestation (AP) does not transmit data using the symbols. Thus, symbols arenot present in empty symbols (empty slots) 9700-02, that is, a modulatedsignal is not present in a time section and a frequency section whichempty symbols (empty slots) 9700-02 occupy.

FIG. 98 illustrates an example in which when the base station (AP)transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 79,when one of data symbol group #FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group#FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, data symbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and datasymbol group #FD4 (#TFD4) 7900-04 present in a period from time t1 totime t2 includes “empty symbols (empty slots)” 9700-02 is generated asillustrated in FIG. 97, the base station (AP) transmits another datasymbol group using “empty symbols (empty slots)” 9700-02.

In FIG. 98, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier), and thehorizontal axis indicates time. The same reference numeral is assignedto a data symbol which operates in the same manner as that in FIG. 97,and description of such a data symbol is omitted. The base station (AP)transmits another data symbol using “empty symbols (empty slots)”9700-02 in FIG. 97.

In FIG. 98, 9800-01 is a preamble and 9800-02 is data symbol group #A,and preamble 9800-01 and data symbol group #A (9800-02) are, forexample, symbols (symbol groups) for transmitting data to new terminal#A.

For example, preamble 9800-01 includes symbols for terminal #A toperform signal detection, time synchronization, frequencysynchronization, and channel estimation, and also includes controlinformation symbols used for generating data symbol group #A such asinformation on an error correction coding method, information on amodulated signal, and information on a transmitting method, and terminal#A can demodulate and decode data symbol group #A by obtaining thecontrol information.

Exemplary Embodiment D has described an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted to data symbol group #FD5,(#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbolgroup #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, anddata symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in a period from time t3to time t4 in FIG. 79, nevertheless the present exemplary embodimentdescribes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data)are not inserted to the data symbol groups.

FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a configuration of data symbol group#FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, datasymbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8)7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in a periodfrom time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 79, when dummy symbols (dummy slots ordummy data) are not inserted to the data symbol groups.

At least one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbolgroup #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, datasymbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9)7900-09 present in a period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 79 includesempty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 99.

FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a configuration of a data symbol groupin a period from time t1 to time t2 when the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 99,9900-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits datausing the symbols.

9900-02 in FIG. 99 denotes empty symbols (or empty slots), and the basestation (AP) does not transmit data using the empty symbols. Thus,symbols are not present in empty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02, that is,a modulated signal is not present in a time section and a frequencysection which empty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02 occupy.

FIG. 100 illustrates an example in which when the base station (AP)transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 79,when one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group#FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, datasymbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9)7900-09 present in a period from time t3 to time t4 includes “emptysymbols (empty slots)” 9900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 99, the basestation (AP) transmits another data symbol group using “empty symbols(empty slots)” 9900-02.

In FIG. 100, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier), and thehorizontal axis indicates time. The same reference numeral is assignedto a data symbol which operates in the same manner as that in FIG. 99,and description of such a data symbol is omitted. The base station (AP)transmits other data symbols using “empty symbols (empty slots)” 9900-02in FIG. 99.

In FIG. 100, 10000-01 denotes a preamble, 10000-02 denotes data symbolgroup #B, and preamble 10000-01 and data symbol group #B (10000-02) are,for example, symbols (symbol groups) for transmitting data to newterminal #B.

For example, preamble 10000-01 includes symbols for terminal #B toperform signal detection, time synchronization, frequencysynchronization, and channel estimation, and also includes controlinformation symbols used for generating data symbol group #B such asinformation on an error correction coding method, information on amodulated signal, and information on a transmitting method, and terminal#B can demodulate and decode data symbol group #B by obtaining thecontrol information.

The first preambles and the second preambles are present, and datasymbol groups are subjected to frequency division in a period from timet1 to time t2 and a period from time t3 to time t4 as illustrated inFIG. 79. Then if the base station (AP) transmits data symbols, the datasymbol groups subjected to frequency division are to include “emptysymbols (empty slots)”.

As described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 100, the base station (AP)transmits data symbol groups using “empty symbols (empty slots)”,whereby an advantageous effect of improvement in data transmissionefficiency can be obtained in a system which includes the base station(AP) and a terminal. At this time, although preambles are transmitted inFIGS. 98 and 100, adding the empty symbols produces an advantageouseffect that a (new) terminal can recognize that a data symbol group ispresent. In addition, the base station (AP) transmits a preamble and adata symbol group as illustrated in FIGS. 98 and 100, wherebyinterference of data symbols can be prevented, that is, a plurality ofdata symbols are prevented from being present at the same time and atthe same frequency, for instance.

Note that the application to data symbol groups subjected to timedivision (or the case in which data symbol groups are arranged such thatthere is no time at which two or more data symbol groups are present) inFIG. 79 is described.

Exemplary Embodiment D has described an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted to data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG. 79,whereas the present exemplary embodiment describes an example in whichdummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted to the datasymbol groups.

Data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11(#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG. 79 include empty symbols (empty slots)10100-02, as illustrated in FIG. 101. FIG. 101 illustrates an example ofa configuration of data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and datasymbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 when the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 101,10100-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits datausing the data symbols.

10100-02 in FIG. 101 denotes empty symbols (or empty slots), and thebase station (AP) does not transmit data using the empty symbols. Thus,symbols are not present in empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02, thatis, a modulated signal is not present in a time section and a frequencysection which empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02 occupy.

The distinguishing point in FIG. 101 is that an empty symbol (emptyslot) is not present over a plurality of time sections. For example,data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 in FIG. 79 is brought into astate as illustrated in FIG. 101. At this time, empty symbols (emptyslots) 10100-02 are present only at time “*50”, as illustrated in FIG.101.

Even if a new data symbol group is transmitted in a state illustrated inFIG. 101, it is difficult to greatly improve data transmissionefficiency. In addition, it is also difficult to transmit a preamble anda data symbol group at different times.

Accordingly, when data symbol groups are subjected to time division (ordata symbol groups are arranged such that there is no time at which twoor more data symbol groups are present), a configuration in which new“preamble and data symbol group” are transmitted is to be applied. Notethat a configuration in which new “preamble and data symbol group” aretransmitted may be applied.

As described above, by newly transmitting (a preamble and) a data symbolgroup, using an “empty symbol (empty slot)” in a data symbol group, anadvantageous effect of improvement in data transmission efficiency canbe obtained in a system which includes a base station (AP) and aterminal.

The following describes another example in the case where the basestation (AP) transmits a modulated signal indicated by a frameconfiguration in FIG. 79, as described in Exemplary Embodiments C and D.

FIG. 102 illustrates an example of another configuration of a framewhich a base station (AP) transmits and is different from theconfiguration in FIG. 79. The same reference numerals are assigned toelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 2 and 79,and description of such elements is omitted.

A difference of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102 from that inFIG. 79 is that a third preamble is inserted in the frame, between timet2 and time t3.

Exemplary Embodiment D has described an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted to data symbol group #FD5(#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbolgroup #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, anddata symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in a period from time t3to time t4 in FIG. 102, whereas the present exemplary embodimentdescribes an example in which dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data)are not inserted to the data symbol groups.

FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a configuration of data symbol group#FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbol group #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, datasymbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, data symbol group #FD8 (#TFD8)7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9) 7900-09 present in a periodfrom time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 102, when dummy symbols (dummy slots ordummy data) are not inserted to the data symbol groups.

At least one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbolgroup #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, datasymbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9)7900-09 present in a period from time t3 to time t4 in FIG. 102 includesempty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 99.

FIG. 99 illustrates an example of a configuration of a data symbol groupin a period from time t3 to time t4 when the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates a frequency (carrier). In FIG. 99,9900-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits datausing the data symbols.

9900-02 in FIG. 99 denotes empty symbols (or empty slots), and the basestation (AP) does not transmit data using the empty symbols. Thus,symbols are not present in empty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02, that is,a modulated signal is not present in a time section and a frequencysection which empty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02 occupy.

FIG. 103 illustrates an example in which when the base station (AP)transmits a modulated signal using the frame configuration in FIG. 102and when one of data symbol group #FD5 (#TFD5) 7900-05, data symbolgroup #FD6 (#TFD6) 7900-06, data symbol group #FD7 (#TFD7) 7900-07, datasymbol group #FD8 (#TFD8) 7900-08, and data symbol group #FD9 (#TFD9)7900-09 present in a period from time t3 to time t4 includes “emptysymbols (empty slots)” 9900-02, as illustrated in FIG. 99, the basestation (AP) transmits another data symbol group using “empty symbols(empty slots)” 9900-02.

In FIG. 103, the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier) and thehorizontal axis indicates time, and the same reference numeral isassigned to a data symbol which operates in the same manner as that inFIG. 99, and description of such a data symbol is omitted. The basestation (AP) transmits other data symbols using “empty symbols (emptyslots)” 9900-02 in FIG. 99.

In FIG. 103, 10300-01 denotes data symbol group #A, and data symbolgroup #B (10300-01) includes symbols (is a symbol group) for, forexample, transmitting data to new terminal #B.

For example, third preamble 10200-01 in FIG. 102 includes symbols forterminal #B to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequencysynchronization, and channel estimation, and control information symbolsused for generating data symbol group #B such as information on an errorcorrection coding method, information on a modulated signal, informationon a transmitting method, and a time position and a frequency positionat which data symbol group #B is present. Thus, terminal #B candemodulate and decode data symbol group #B by obtaining the controlinformation.

Note that in FIG. 102, the third preamble is inserted between time t2and time t3, yet the third preamble may be inserted between time t0 andtime t1. At this time, for example, at least one of data symbol group#FD1 (#TFD1) 7900-01, data symbol group #FD2 (#TFD2) 7900-02, datasymbol group #FD3 (#TFD3) 7900-03, and data symbol group #FD4 (#TFD4)7900-04 present in a period from time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 102 includesempty symbols (empty slots) 9900-02 as illustrated in FIG. 99, and datasymbol group #B may be transmitted using empty symbols (empty slots)9900-02, as illustrated in FIG. 103.

The application to data symbol groups subjected to time division (or thecase in which data symbol groups are arranged such that there is no timeat which two or more data symbol groups are present) in FIG. 102 isdescribed.

Exemplary Embodiment D has described an example in which dummy symbols(dummy slots or dummy data) are inserted to data symbol group #TD10(#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG.102, whereas the present exemplary embodiment describes an example inwhich dummy symbols (dummy slots or dummy data) are not inserted to thedata symbol groups.

Data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and data symbol group #TD11(#TFD11) 7900-11 in FIG. 102 include empty symbols (empty slots)10100-02 as illustrated in FIG. 101. FIG. 101 illustrates an example ofa configuration of data symbol group #10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 and datasymbol group #TD11 (#TFD11) 7900-11 when the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier). In FIG. 101,10100-01 denotes data symbols, and the base station (AP) transmits datausing the data symbols.

10100-02 in FIG. 101 denotes empty symbols (or empty slots), and thebase station (AP) does not transmit data using the empty symbols. Thus,symbols are not present in empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02, thatis, a modulated signal is not present in a time section and a frequencysection which empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02 occupy.

The distinguishing point in FIG. 101 is that an empty symbol (emptyslot) is not present over a plurality of time sections. For example,data symbol group #TD10 (#TFD10) 7900-10 in FIG. 79 is brought into astate as illustrated in FIG. 101. At this time, as illustrated in FIG.101, empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02 are present only at time“*50.”

If a new data symbol group is transmitted in the state in FIG. 101, datatransmission efficiency improves although the improvement is not to begreatly made. For example, if the usage does not involve high-speed datatransmission, empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02 can be effectivelyused for data transmission.

At this time, third preamble 10400-01 is inserted between time t4 andtime t5, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (note that in FIG. 104, thehorizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency, and the same reference numerals are assigned to elementswhich operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 79, and description ofsuch elements is omitted). As illustrated in FIG. 105, data symbol group#C (10500-01) is transmitted using empty symbols (empty slots) 10100-02illustrated in FIG. 101 (note that in FIG. 105, the horizontal axisindicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency, and the samereference numeral is assigned to an element which operates in the samemanner as that in FIG. 101, and description of such an element isomitted).

In FIG. 105, data symbol group #C (10500-01) includes symbols (is asymbol group) for, for example, transmitting data to new terminal #C.

For example, third preamble 10400-01 in FIG. 104 includes symbols forterminal #C to perform signal detection, time synchronization, frequencysynchronization, and channel estimation, and control information symbolsused for generating data symbol group #C such as information on an errorcorrection coding method, information on a modulated signal, informationon a transmitting method, and a time position and a frequency positionat which data symbol group #C is present. Thus, terminal #C candemodulate and decode data symbol group #C by obtaining the controlinformation.

Note that a frame configuration as illustrated in FIG. 105 in which datasymbol group #C (10500-01) is not transmitted may be adopted.

As described above, by newly transmitting a data symbol group using“empty symbols (empty slots)” in a data symbol group, an advantageouseffect of improvement in data transmission efficiency can be obtained ina system which includes a base station (AP) and a terminal.

Note that transmitting methods in FIGS. 100 and 102 are methods oftransmitting a (new) data symbol group and a preamble, yet the basestation (AP) may transmit a data symbol group and a preamble usingeither of the transmitting methods. Depending on the communicationcondition, the base station (AP) may switch between the transmittingmethods in FIGS. 100 and 102, and may transmit a data symbol group and apreamble. Note that the base station (AP) may determine whether toswitch between the transmitting methods in FIGS. 100 and 102, or thebase station (AP) may switch between the transmitting methods accordingto a designation from a terminal communicating with the base station(AP).

(Supplementary Note 3)

Exemplary embodiments C and D, for instance, have described a method inwhich the base station (AP) inserts a dummy symbol to a data symbolgroup, and Exemplary Embodiment C has described a method in which thebase station (AP) arranges an empty symbol (empty slot) in a data symbolgroup. At this time, for each frame, the base station (AP) may switchbetween a method of inserting a dummy symbol to a data symbol group anda method of arranging an empty symbol (empty slot) in a data symbolgroup, and use the switched method.

This specification has described the case of setting a “carrierinterval” as an example of setting “the FFT size or the Fouriertransform size”, yet the present disclosure is not limited to this, and“the number of subcarriers used for an OFDM modulated signal” may be setby setting “the FFT size or the Fourier transform size”.

For example, changing “the FFT size or the Fourier transform size” meanschanging “the number of subcarriers used for an OFDM modulated signal”.

Various frame configurations have been described in this specification.The base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal having a frameconfiguration described in this specification, using a multi-carriermethod such as an OFDM method. At this time, when a terminalcommunicating with the base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal,the modulated signal transmitted by the terminal may be based on asingle carrier method (the base station (AP) can simultaneously transmitdata symbol groups to a plurality of terminals using the OFDM method,and a terminal can reduce power consumption by using a single carriermethod).

A time division duplex (TDD) method in which a terminal transmits amodulation signal, using a portion of a frequency band used for amodulated signal transmitted by the base station (AP) may be applied.

This specification describes operation and configurations of a basestation (AP) and a terminal. For example, FIG. 74 illustrates an exampleof a configuration of the base station (AP), and FIG. 75 illustrates aconfiguration of a terminal. The number of transmission antennas is oneand the number of receiving antennas is one in FIG. 74, yet as describedin this specification, the MIMO transmitting method and/or the MISOmethod may be applied as a transmitting method, and thus the number oftransmission antennas is not limited to one and may be two or more, andfurthermore, the number of receiving antennas is not limited to one, andmay be two or more. Similarly, the number of transmission antennas isone and the number of receiving antennas is one in FIG. 75, yet asdescribed in this specification, the MIMO transmitting method and/or theMISO method may be applied as a transmitting method, and thus the numberof transmission antennas is not limited to one and may be two or more,and furthermore, the number of receiving antennas is not limited to oneand may be two or more.

FIGS. 74 and 75 illustrate transmission antenna 7400-04, receivingantenna 7400-05, transmission antenna 7500-04, and receiving antenna7500-05, yet transmission antennas 7400-04 and 7500-04 may each includea plurality of antennas, and receiving antennas 7400-05 and 7500-05 mayeach include a plurality of antennas. The following gives supplementarydescription with regard to these points.

FIG. 106 illustrates an example of a configuration of transmissionantennas 7400-04 and 7500-04, for example.

Divider 10600-02 receives an input of transmission signal 10600-01.Divider 10600-02 divides transmission signal 10600-01, and outputstransmission signals 10600-03_1, 10600-03_2, 10600-03_3, and 10600-03_4.

Multiplier 10600-04_1 receives inputs of transmission signal 10600-03_1and control signal 10600-00. Based on information on a multiplicationcoefficient included in control signal 10600-00, multiplier 10600-04_1multiplies transmission signal 10600-03_1 by the multiplicationcoefficient, and outputs signal 10600-05_1 obtained as a result of themultiplication, and signal 10600-05_1 obtained as a result of themultiplication is output from antenna 10600-06_1 as a radio wave.

When transmission signal 10600-03_1 is denoted by T×1(t) (t: time) andthe multiplication coefficient is denoted by W1, signal 10600-05_1obtained as a result of the multiplication can be represented byT×1(t)×W1. W1 can be defined by a complex number, and thus may be a realnumber.

Multiplier 10600-04_2 receives inputs of transmission signal 10600-03_2and control signal 10600-00. Based on information on a multiplicationcoefficient included in control signal 10600-00, multiplier 10600-04_2multiplies transmission signal 10600-03_2 by the multiplicationcoefficient, and outputs signal 10600-05_2 as a result of themultiplication, and signal 10600-05_2 obtained as a result of themultiplication is output from antenna 10600-06_2 as a radio wave.

When transmission signal 10600-03_2 is denoted by T×2(t) (t: time) andthe multiplication coefficient is denoted by W2, signal 10600-05_2obtained as a result of the multiplication can be represented byT×2(t)×W2. W2 can be defined by a complex number, and thus may be a realnumber.

Multiplier 10600-04_3 receives inputs of transmission signal 10600-03_3and control signal 10600-00. Based on information on a multiplicationcoefficient included in control signal 10600-00, multiplier 10600-04_3multiplies transmission signal 10600-03_3 by the multiplicationcoefficient, and outputs signal 10600-05_3 obtained as a result of themultiplication, and signal 10600-05_3 obtained as a result of themultiplication is output from antenna 10600-06_3 as a radio wave.

When transmission signal 10600-03_3 is denoted by T×3(t) (t: time) andthe multiplication coefficient is denoted by W3, signal 10600-05_3obtained as a result of the multiplication can be represented byT×3(t)×W3. W3 can be defined by a complex number, and thus may be a realnumber.

Multiplier 10600-04_4 receives inputs of transmission signal 10600-03_4and control signal 10600-00. Based on information on a multiplicationcoefficient included in control signal 10600-00, multiplier 10600-04_4multiplies transmission signal 10600-03_4 by the multiplicationcoefficient, and outputs signal 10600-05_4 obtained as a result of themultiplication, and signal 10600-05_4 as a result of the multiplicationis output from antenna 10600-06_4 as a radio wave.

When transmission signal 10600-03_4 is denoted by T×4(t) (t: time) andthe multiplication coefficient is denoted by W4, signal 10600-05_4obtained as a result of the multiplication can be expressed byT×4(t)×W4. W4 can be defined by a complex number, and thus may be a realnumber.

Note that the following may be satisfied, “the absolute value of W1, theabsolute value of W2, the absolute value of W3, and the absolute valueof W4 are the same”. In this case, this corresponds to a state in whicha phase has been changed. Of course, the absolute value of W1, theabsolute value of W2, the absolute value of W3, and the absolute valueof W4 may not be the same.

FIG. 106 illustrates an example in which each antenna includes fourantennas (and four multipliers), yet the number of antennas is notlimited to 4, and may include two or more antennas.

FIG. 107 illustrates an example of a configuration of receiving antennas7400-05 and 7500-05, for example.

Multiplier 10700-03_1 receives inputs of received signal 10700-02_1received by antenna 10700-01_1 and control signal 10700-00. Based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal10700-00, multiplier 10700-03_1 multiplies received signal 10700-02_1 bythe multiplication coefficient, and outputs signal 10700-04_1 obtainedas a result of the multiplication.

When received signal 10700-02_1 is denoted by R×1(t) (t: time) and themultiplication coefficient is denoted by D1, signal 10700-04_1 obtainedas a result of the multiplication can be expressed by R×1(t)×D1. D1 canbe defined by a complex number, and thus may be a real number.

Multiplier 10700-03_2 receives inputs of received signal 10700-02_2received by antenna 10700-01_2 and control signal 10700-00. Based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal10700-00, multiplier 10700-03_2 multiplies received signal 10700-02_2 bythe multiplication coefficient, and outputs signal 10700-04_2 obtainedas a result of the multiplication.

When received signal 10700-02_2 is denoted by R×2(t) (t: time) and themultiplication coefficient is denoted by D2, signal 10700-04_2 as aresult of the multiplication can be expressed by R×2(t)×D2. D2 can bedefined by a complex number, and thus may be a real number.

Multiplier 10700-03_3 receives inputs of received signal 10700-02_3received by antenna 10700-01_3 and control signal 10700-00. Based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal10700-00, multiplier 10700-03_3 multiplies received signal 10700-02_3 bythe multiplication coefficient, and outputs signal 10700-04_3 obtainedas a result of the multiplication.

When received signal 10700-02_3 is denoted by R×3(t) (t: time) and themultiplication coefficient is denoted by D3, signal 10700-04_3 obtainedas a result of the multiplication can be expressed by R×3(t)×D3. D3 canbe defined by a complex number, and thus may be a real number.

Multiplier 10700-03_4 receives inputs of received signal 10700-02_4received by antenna 10700-01_4 and control signal 10700-00. Based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal10700-00, multiplier 10700-03_4 multiplies received signal 10700-02_4 bythe multiplication coefficient, and outputs signal 10700-04_4 obtainedas a result of the multiplication.

When received signal 10700-02_4 is denoted by R×4(t) (t: time) and themultiplication coefficient is denoted by D4, signal 10700-044 obtainedas a result of the multiplication can be expressed by R×4(t)×D4. D4 canbe defined by a complex number, and thus may be a real number.

Combiner 10700-05 combines signals 10700-04_1, 10700-04_2, 10700-04_3,and 10700-04_4 all obtained as a result of the multiplication, andoutputs combined signal 10700-06. Note that combined signal 10700-06 canbe expressed by R×1(t)×D1+R×2(t)×D2+R×3(t)×D3+R×4(t)×D4.

FIG. 107 illustrates an example in which each antenna includes fourantennas (and four multipliers), yet the number of antennas is notlimited to four, and may include two or more antennas.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

The present disclosure is widely applicable to a wireless system whichtransmits different modulated signals from a plurality of antennas,respectively. Moreover, the present disclosure is also applicable to acase where MIMO transmission is performed in a wired communicationsystem having a plurality of transmission portions (for example, a PLC(Power Line Communication) system, an optical communication system, anda DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) system).

REFERENCE MARKS IN THE DRAWINGS

-   -   102 data generator    -   105 second preamble generator    -   108 control signal generator    -   110 frame configuring unit    -   112 signal processor    -   114 pilot insertion unit    -   116 IFFT unit    -   118 PAPR reduction unit    -   120 guard interval insertion unit    -   122 first preamble insertion unit    -   124 wireless processor    -   126 antenna

The invention claimed is:
 1. A transmitting method comprising:configuring a preamble and one or more subframes following the preamble,the preamble carrying control information, the one or more subframesincluding a first subframe and a second subframe, the first subframebeing configured by mapping first modulated signals of a first PhysicalLayer Pipe (PLP) and second modulated signals of a second PLP ontotime-frequency resources used for data transmission in the firstsubframe, the second subframe being configured by mapping thirdmodulated signals of a third PLP onto time-frequency resources used fordata transmission in the second subframe; inserting pilot signals intothe preamble and the one or more subframes; performing an Inverse FastFourier Transform (IFFT) processing on the preamble and the one or moresubframes into which the pilot signals are inserted to generate anorthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) signal; andtransmitting the OFDM signal, wherein the time-frequency resources inthe first subframe includes first resources and second resources thatare provided for a first OFDM symbol and a second OFDM symbol,respectively, the first resources being arranged in a frequencydirection and corresponding to respective OFDM subcarriers for datatransmission, the second resources being arranged in the frequencydirection and corresponding to the respective OFDM subcarriers for datatransmission, the first resources being adjacent to the second resourcesin a time direction, the first modulated signals include a firstsequence of first modulated signals and a second sequence of firstmodulated signals following the first sequence, the first sequence ismapped onto the first resources within a first range in the frequencydirection, the second sequence is mapped onto the second resourceswithin the first range, the second modulated signals include a thirdsequence of modulated signals and a fourth sequence of modulated signalsfollowing the third sequence, the third sequence is mapped onto thefirst resources within a second range in the frequency direction, thefourth sequence is mapped onto the second resources within the secondrange, the control information includes first information, secondinformation, and third information, the first information, specified asa position relative to a beginning of the first subframe, indicates astarting position of time-frequency resources provided for the firstmodulated signals, the second information, specified as a positionrelative to the beginning of the first subframe, indicates a startingposition of time-frequency resources provided for the second modulatedsignals, and the third information, specified as a position relative toa beginning of the second subframe, indicates a starting position oftime-frequency resources provided for the third modulated signals. 2.The transmitting method according to claim 1, wherein a last modulatedsignal of the first sequence is mapped onto a resource among the firstresources corresponding to a highest frequency in the first range, andan initial modulated signal of the second sequence is mapped onto aresource among the second resources corresponding to a lowest frequencyin the first range.
 3. A receiving method comprising: receiving anorthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) signal, wherein theOFDM signal is generated by inserting pilot signals into a preamble andone or more subframes following to the preamble and performing anInverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) process to the preamble and theone or more subframes into which the pilot signals are inserted, thepreamble carries control information, the one or more subframes includesa first subframe and a second subframe, the first subframe is configuredby mapping first modulated signals of a first Physical Layer Pipe (PLP)and second modulated signals of a second PLP onto time-frequencyresources used for data transmission in the first subframe, the secondsubframe is configured by mapping third modulated signals of a third PLPonto time-frequency resources used for data transmission in the secondsubframe, the time-frequency resources in the first subframe includesfirst resources and second resources that are provided for a first OFDMsymbol and a second OFDM symbol, respectively, the first resources beingarranged in a frequency direction and corresponding to respective OFDMsubcarriers for data transmission, the second resources being arrangedin the frequency direction and corresponding to the respective OFDMsubcarriers for data transmission, the first resources being adjacent tothe second resources in a time direction, the first modulated signalsinclude a first sequence of first modulated signals and a secondsequence of first modulated signals following the first sequence, thefirst sequence is mapped onto the first resources within a first rangein the frequency direction, the second sequence is mapped onto thesecond resources within the first range, the second modulated signalsinclude a third sequence of modulated signals and a fourth sequence ofmodulated signals following the third sequence, the third sequence ismapped onto the first resources within a second range in the frequencydirection, the fourth sequence is mapped onto the second resourceswithin the second range, the control information includes firstinformation, second information, and third information, the firstinformation, specified as a position relative to a beginning of thefirst subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the first modulated signals, the secondinformation, specified as a position relative to the beginning of thefirst subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the second modulated signals, and the thirdinformation, specified as a position relative to a beginning of thesecond subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the third modulated signals, and the receivingmethod further comprises demodulating the received OFDM signal to obtainreceived data of the first PLP, the second PLP, or the third PLP byusing the time-frequency resources provided for the PLP to be received.4. The receiving method according to claim 3, wherein a last modulatedsignal of the first sequence is mapped onto a resource among the firstresources corresponding to a highest frequency in the first range, andan initial modulated signal of the second sequence is mapped onto aresource among the second resources corresponding to a lowest frequencyin the first range.
 5. A transmitting apparatus comprising: a frameconfigurator that, in operation, configures a preamble and one or moresubframes following the preamble, the preamble carrying controlinformation, the one or more subframes including a first subframe and asecond subframe, the first subframe being configured by mapping firstmodulated signals of a first Physical Layer Pipe (PLP) and secondmodulated signals of a second PLP onto time-frequency resources used fordata transmission in the first subframe, the second subframe beingconfigured by mapping third modulated signals of a third PLP ontotime-frequency resources used for data transmission in the secondsubframe; a pilot inserter that, in operation, inserts pilot signalsinto the preamble and the one or more subframes; an Inverse Fast FourierTransform (IFFT) processor that, in operation, performs an IFFTprocessing on the preamble and the one or more subframes into which thepilot signals are inserted to generate an orthogonal frequency-divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) signal; and a transmitter that, in operation,transmits the OFDM signal, wherein the time-frequency resources in thefirst subframe includes first resources and second resources that areprovided for a first OFDM symbol and a second OFDM symbol, respectively,the first resources being arranged in a frequency direction andcorresponding to respective OFDM subcarriers for data transmission, thesecond resources being arranged in the frequency direction andcorresponding to the respective OFDM subcarriers for data transmission,the first resources being adjacent to the second resources in a timedirection, the first modulated signals include a first sequence of firstmodulated signals and a second sequence of first modulated signalsfollowing the first sequence, the first sequence is mapped onto thefirst resources within a first range in the frequency direction, thesecond sequence is mapped onto the second resources within the firstrange, the second modulated signals include a third sequence ofmodulated signals and a fourth sequence of modulated signals followingthe third sequence, the third sequence is mapped onto the firstresources within a second range in the frequency direction, the fourthsequence is mapped onto the second resources within the second range,the control information includes first information, second information,and third information, the first information, specified as a positionrelative to a beginning of the first subframe, indicates a startingposition of time-frequency resources provided for the first modulatedsignals, the second information, specified as a position relative to thebeginning of the first subframe, indicates a starting position oftime-frequency resources provided for the second modulated signals, andthe third information, specified as a position relative to a beginningof the second subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the third modulated signals.
 6. The transmittingapparatus according to claim 5, wherein a last modulated signal of thefirst sequence is mapped onto a resource among the first resourcescorresponding to the highest frequency in the first range, and aninitial modulated signal of the second sequence is mapped onto aresource among the second resources corresponding to the lowestfrequency in the first range.
 7. A receiving apparatus comprising: areceiver that, in operation, receives an orthogonal frequency-divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) signal, wherein the OFDM signal is generated byinserting pilot signals into a preamble and one or more subframesfollowing to the preamble and performing an Inverse Fast FourierTransform (IFFT) process to the preamble and the one or more subframesinto which the pilot signals are inserted, the preamble carries controlinformation, the one or more subframes includes a first subframe and asecond subframe, the first subframe is configured by mapping firstmodulated signals of a first Physical Layer Pipe (PLP) and secondmodulated signals of a second PLP onto time-frequency resources used fordata transmission in the first subframe, the second subframe isconfigured by mapping third modulated signals of a third PLP ontotime-frequency resources used for data transmission in the secondsubframe, the time-frequency resources in the first subframe includesfirst resources and second resources that are provided for a first OFDMsymbol and a second OFDM symbol, respectively, the first resources beingarranged in a frequency direction and corresponding to respective OFDMsubcarriers for data transmission, the second resources being arrangedin the frequency direction and corresponding to the respective OFDMsubcarriers for data transmission, the first resources being adjacent tothe second resources in a time direction, the first modulated signalsinclude a first sequence of first modulated signals and a secondsequence of first modulated signals following the first sequence, thefirst sequence is mapped onto the first resources within a first rangein the frequency direction, the second sequence is mapped onto thesecond resources within the first range, the second modulated signalsinclude a third sequence of modulated signals and a fourth sequence ofmodulated signals following the third sequence, the third sequence ismapped onto the first resources within a second range in the frequencydirection, the fourth sequence is mapped onto the second resourceswithin the second range, the control information includes firstinformation, second information, and third information, the firstinformation, specified as a position relative to a beginning of thefirst subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the first modulated signals, the secondinformation, specified as a position relative to the beginning of thefirst subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the second modulated signals, and the thirdinformation, specified as a position relative to a beginning of thesecond subframe, indicates a starting position of time-frequencyresources provided for the third modulated signals, and the receivingapparatus further comprises a demodulator that, in operation,demodulates the received OFDM signal to obtain received data of at leastone PLP among the first PLP, the second PLP, and the third PLP by usingthe time-frequency resources provided for the at least one PLP.
 8. Thereceiving apparatus according to claim 7, wherein a last modulatedsignal of the first sequence is mapped onto a resource among the firstresources corresponding to a highest frequency in the first range, andan initial modulated signal of the second sequence is mapped onto aresource among the second resources corresponding to a lowest frequencyin the first range.